Explanatory Note

This is a flat text file of bibliographical references that you may find useful, and includes relevant papers from genetics, archaeology, history. There is some duplication, typos etc. so any corrections are welcome, as are additions. It is not a substitute for Arun Gosh's Bibliotheca Austroasiatica (1988) or Frank Huffman's Bibliography and Index of Mainland Southeast Asian Languages and Linguistics (1986), or other published bibliographies. See also http://sealang.net/sala/ for extensive bibliographical resources and downloads for SEAsian linguistics. And please note that helpful recommendations to use a proper bibliographic database will be added to the heap with all the others. Enjoy!

Abbi, Anvita. 1979. “The Sound System of Khasi.” Jan Jati Bhashae aur Hindi Sikshan. Agra: Kendriya Hindi Samsthan

Abbi, Anvita. 1993. Language Contraction, Language Shrink, and Language Conflation: A Case Study of Kharia. Continuity and Change in Tribal Society. Ed. by Mrinal Miri. Simla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study. 542-553

Acharya, S.K. 1971. “Languages of Khasis.” Main Stream, May 22:19-26 (Calcutta)

Adams, Karen Lee. 1989. Systems of Numeral Classification in the Mon-Khmer, Nicobarese and Aslian Subfamilies of Austroasiatic. Pacific Linguistics Series B-No.101. Canberra, Australian National University.

Adams, Karen Lee. 1992. Comparison of the numeral classification of humans in Mon-Khmer.  Mon-Khmer Studies 21.107–129.

Adelaar, K. Alexander. 1992. Proto Malayic: The Reconstruction of its Phonology and Parts of its Lexicon and Morphology. Pacific Linguistics Series C-119. Canberra, Australian National University.

Adelaar, K. Alexander. 1995. "Borneo as a crossroads for comparative Austronesian linguistics." In The Austronesians: Historical and Comparative Perspectives, ed. Peter Bellwood, James J. Fox, and Darrell Tryon, pp. 75-95. Canberra: Department of Anthropology, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.

Ahlner, Felix. 2010. ‘Body part terms in Kammu’. Mon-Khmer studies 39, 29–59.

Alangkorn, Khnittha (ขนิษฐา อลังกรณ์). 2008. “An analytical study of merit making in inscriptions moderns d’Angkor (IMA) / การศึกษาวิเคราะห์การทำบุญในจารึกนครวัดสมัยหลังพระนคร.” Silpakorn University.

Aldridge, Edith. 2015 (online). Old Chinese syntax: Basic word order. In The Encyclopedia of Chinese Language and Linguistics, General Editor Rint Sybesma. Accessed 19 December 2016. http://dx. doi. org/10. 1163/2210-7363_ecll_COM_00000307. 

Alieva, Natalia F. 1984. A language-union in Indo-China. Asian and African Studies 20:11-22.

Alves, Mark. 1995. Tonal features and the development of Vietnamese tones.  Working Papers in Linguistics. Manoa: University of Hawaii 27.1–13.

Alves, Mark. 2000. The current status of Vietnamese genetic linguistic studies.  The Fifth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics. Hochiminh City: Ho Chi Minh City University of Social Sciences and Humanities, pp. 6–17.

Alves, Mark J. 2001. What's so Chinese about Vietnamese? In G.W. Thurgood (ed.) Papers from the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society.rizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies. pp. 221-242.

Alves, Mark. 2001. Distributional properties of causative verbs in some Mon-Khmer languages.  Mon-Khmer Studies 31:107–120.

Alves, Mark. 2001. A Pacoh Analytic Grammar. PhD thesis, University of Hawai'i. 

Alves, Mark J. 2003. Ruc and other Minor Vietic languages: Linguistic strands between Vietnamese and the rest of the Mon-Khmer language family. In Papers from the Seventh Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, Karen L. Adams, Thomas John Hudak, and F. K. Lehman eds. Tempe, Arizona: Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies. pp. 3-19.

Alves, Mark. 2005. The Vieto-Katuic hypothesis: lexical evidence. In Paul Sidwell (ed.), SEALS XV Papers from the 15th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2003, 169-176. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University.

Alves, Mark J. 2005. Sino-Vietnamese grammatical vocabulary and triggers for grammaticalization. The 6th Pan-Asiatic International Symposium on Linguistics. Hà Nội: Nhà Xuất Bản Khoa Học Xã Hội (Social Sciences Publishing House). pp. 315-332. 

Alves, Mark. 2005. Notes on Ruc. Manuscript. 

Alves, Mark J. 2006. Linguistic research on the origins of the Vietnamese language: An overview. Journal of Vietnamese Studies 1.1-2:104-130. 

Alves, Mark. 2006. A Grammar of Pacoh: a Mon-Khmer language of the central highlands of Vietnam. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. 

Alves, Mark J. 2007. A look at North-Central Vietnamese. In SEALS XII Papers from the 12th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2002, Ratree Wayland, John Hartmann Paul Sidwell eds. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. pp. 1-7. 

Alves, Mark J. 2009. Loanwords in Vietnamese. In Loanwords in the World’s Languages: A Comparative Handbook, Martin Haspelmath and Uri Tadmor eds. Berlin/Boston: De Gruyter Mouton. pp. 617-637. 

Alves, Mark J. 2009. Sino-Vietnamese grammatical vocabulary sociolinguistic conditions for borrowing. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1:1-9. 

Alves, Mark. 2014. Mon-Khmer derivational morphology. In Pavel Stekauer and Rochelle Lieber (eds.), The Oxford Handbook of Derivational Morphology. Oxford University Press. pp. 520–544.

Alves, Mark. 2014. Pacoh. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp. 881-906.

Alves, Mark J. 2015. Morphological functions among Mon-Khmer Languages: Beyond the basics. In Nick Enfield and Bernard Comrie eds.  Mainland Southeast Asian Languages: The State of the Art. Berlin/Boston: Mouton de Gruyter. pp. 531-557. 

Alves, Mark J. 2015. Grammatical Sino-Tai vocabulary and implications for ancient Sino-Tai sociolinguistic contact. Paper given at the 48th Annual International Conference of Sino-Tibetan Linguistics, UC Santa Barbara, August 21-23, 2015. Powerpoint presentation. 

Alves, Mark J. 2015. Historical notes on words for knives, swords, and other metal implements in Early Southern China and Mainland Southeast Asia. Mon-Khmer Studies 44:39-56.

Alves, Mark J. 2016. Identifying Early Sino-Vietnamese Vocabulary via Linguistic, Historical, Archaeological, and Ethnological Data, in Bulletin of Chinese Linguistics 9 (2016):264-295. 

Alves, Mark J. 2017. Etymological research on Vietnamese with databases and other resources. Ngôn Ngữ Học Việt Nam, 30 Năm Đổi Mới và Phát Triển (Kỷ Yếu Hội Thảo Khoa Học Quốc Tế), 183-211. Hà Nội: Nhà Xuất Bản Khoa Học Xã Hội. 

Alves, Mark J. 2018. Chinese Loanwords in Vietnamese Pronouns and Terms of Address and Reference, in Proceedings of the 29th North American Conference on Chinese Linguistics (NACCL-29), 2017, Volume 1, ed. by Marjorie K.M. Chan and Hana Kang, 286-303. Columbus, Ohio: The Ohio State University. 

Alves, Mark J. 2019a. Chinese Loanwords in the Vietnamese System of Color Terms, in Proceedings of the 30th North American Conference on Chinese Linguistics (NACCL-30), Volume 2:341-355. Columbus, Ohio: The Ohio State University. 

Alves, Mark J. 2019b. Dữ liệu liên ngành: chi Vietic kết nối với văn hóa Đông Sơn. Presentation given to the University of Hanoi, Department of Social Science and Humanities, 23 May, 2019. 

Alves, Mark J. 2020. Initial Steps in Reconstructing Proto-Vietic Syntax. In Austroasiatic Syntax in Areal and Diachronic Perspective, ed. by Paul Sidwell, Mathias Jenny, and Mark Alves, 46-81. Brill Publishers. 

Alves, Mark. 2021. Linguistic influence of Chinese in Southeast Asia. In Paul Sidwell & Mathias Jenny (eds.) The Languages and Linguistics of Mainland Southeast Asia: A Comprehensive Guide. Walter de Gruyter: Berlin/Boston. pp.649-671.

Amornsukdi, Bussaba. 1987. “Phonological Reduplication in Vietnamese / ระบบเสียงคำซ้ำในภาษาเวียตนาม.” Mahidol University.

Amphoe Borai, Changwat Trat. MA Thesis. Silapakorn University. [A description of the

Anderbeck, Karl. 2003. Malay Dialects of the Batanghari River Basin. Masters thesis. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Anderson, Gregory (ed.). 2008. The Munda Languages. London/New York: Routledge.

Anderson, Gregory D.S. & John P. Boyle. to appear. “Switch-Reference in South Munda” M. Macken (ed.). Southeast Asian Linguistics 10.

Anderson, Gregory D.S. & Norman H. Zide. 2001. “Recent Advances in the Reconstruction of the Proto-Munda Verb” Laurel Brinton (ed.). Historical Linguistics 1999. Amsterdam: Benjamins. 13-30 

Anderson, Gregory D.S. & Norman H. Zide. 2002. “Issues in Proto-Munda and Proto-Austroasiatic Nominal Derivation: The Bimoraic Constraint” Marlys A. Macken (ed.). Papers from the 10th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. Tempe, AZ: Arizona State University. (South East Asian Studies Program, Monograph Series Press). 55-74

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 1995. “Towards an Analysis of the North Munda Verb”. Chicago: MS

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 1999. “A Typology of Inflection in Auxiliary Verb Constructions: Contributions of Minor Language Data. Chicago Linguistic Society, 35: Panel on Linguistic Diversity and Linguistic Theory. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 1999. “Referent Indexing in the Munda Verb”. Chicago: MS

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 2000. “Split-Inflection in Auxiliary Verb Constructions” To appear in: N.M. Antrim, G. Goodall et al. (eds.). WECOL 1999

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 2001. “A New Classification of South Munda: Evidence from Comparative Verb Morphology.” Indian Linguistics 62:21-36

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 2001. “Noun Incorporation in Munda” Chicago: MS

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 2001. “Recent Advances in Proto-Munda and Proto-Austroasiatic Reconstruction” Paper presented at the 3rd Harvard Round Table on the Prehistory of Central and South Asia, Cambridge, MA, May, 2001

Anderson, Gregory D.S. 2004. Advances in Proto-Munda reconstruction. Mon-Khmer Studies Journal, 34:159-184.

Anderson, Gregory. 2020. Proto-Munda Prosody, Morphotactics and Morphosyntax in South Asian and Austroasiatic Contexts. In Mathias Jenny, Paul Sidwell, Mark Alves (eds.) Austroasiatic Syntax in Areal and Diachronic Perspective. Leiden/Boston: Brill.

Anonymous. 1929. Tea Districts Labour Association Language Handbook: Santhali. Calcutta: Catholic Orphan Press

Anonymous. 1940. Korku-Hindi-English Dictionary. Nagpur

Anonymous. 1962. “The Nicobar and Bibliography on the Islands.” Dacca. Oriental Geographer 6.6:82-96

Antelme, Michel Rethy & Hélène Suppya Bru-Nut. 2001. Dictionnaire Français-Khmer. Paris, L'Asiathèque.

Anttila, Raimo. 1972. Historical and Comparative Linguistics. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Ansaldo, Umberto. 2010. Surpass comparatives in Sinitic and beyond: typology and grammaticalization. Linguistics 48.4:919-950. 

Archer, W.G. (ed.). 1942 Khar.iya along, A Kharia Song Book. Ranchi

Arunkumar, GaneshPrasad Arunkumar, Lan-Hai Wei, Valampuri John Kavitha, Adhikarla Syama, Varatharajan Santhakumari Arun, Surendra Sathua, Raghunath Sahoo, R. Balakrishnan, Tomo Riba, Jharna Chakravarthy, Bapukan Chaudhury, Premanada Panda, Pradipta K. Das, Prasanna K. Nayak, Hui Li, Ramasamy Pitchappan, and The Genographic Consortium. 2015. A late Neolithic expansion of Y chromosomal haplogroup O2a1-M95 from east to west. Journal of Systematics and Evolution 53.6:546-560. doi: 10.1111/jse.12147.

Asai, Erin. 1957. Alak Vocabulary. ms. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok. Mon-Khmer folder 495.93.

Asmah Haji Omar. 2014.  The Mah Meri Language: An Introduction.  Kuala Lumpur, University of Malaya Press.

Asmah, Haji Omar. 1963. Bahasa Semang: Dialek Kentakbong. Honors thesis, Jabatan Pengajian Melayu, Universiti Malaya, Kuala Lumpur.

Asouti, Eleni and Dorian Fuller. 2013. A Contextual Approach to the Emergence of Agriculture in Southwest Asia: Reconstructing Early Neolithic Plant-Food Production. Current Anthropology 54.3:299-345. DOI: 10.1086/670679

Avery, J. 1883. “On the Khasi Language.” American Oriental Society Proceedings, Vol II:clxxiii-clxxv. Also in the Journal of the American Oriental Society, Vol. XI, 1885

Aymonier’s Dictionnaire khmer-français, published in 1878, which expanded upon his earlier (1874), shorter, Vocabulaire cambodian-français 

Aymonier, Etienne and Antoine Cabaton. 1906. Dictionaire cam-français. Paris: Leroux.

Aze, F. Richard. 1973. “Clause Patterns in Parengi-Gorum.” In: Ronald L. Trail (ed.): Patterns in clause, sentence, discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal. Norman, OK: SIL. Part I: 235-312

Aze, F. Richard. 1973. “Parengi word list.” R.L. Trail (ed.). Patterns in clause, sentence, discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal. Norman, OK: SIL. Part IV

Aze, F. Richard. 1974. The Stuatus of Glotalization in Parengi (Gorum). Proceedings of All India Conference of Linguists, 1972. pp. 84-95. Linguistics Society of India. 

Aze, Richard & Trish. 1973. “Parengi Texts. “ In: R.L. Trail (ed.): Patterns in clause, sentence, discourse in selected languages of India and Nepal. Norman, OK: SIL. Part II: 213-362

Azémar, H. 1886. Dictionaire Stieng. Receuil de 2,500 mots fait à Br]lâm en 1865. Excursions et Reconnaissances 12:99-146, 251-344.

BA SHIN. 1962. The Lokahteikpan- Early Burmese culture in a Pagan temple. [Rangoon, Rangoon UP] (= Burma Historical Commission). [vi], iv, 210pp., [ii], 70 pll., map. [Mon ink glosses on north, east and west wall, in modern Mon script, transliteration and English translation; glossary of OM words; apences A, B by G. H. Luce]

Babaev, Kirill V. and Irina V. Samarina. 2018. May language: Materials of the Russian-Vietnamese linguistic expedition (in Russian). YASK Publishing House. 

Ba?, Juliuyus. 1983. Khaɽiya dhvanisâstra. Kharia Phonetics. Ranchi: Merî Silîm

Bahl, K.C. 1962. Korwa Lexicon. South Asian Languages Program, University of Chicago (Mimeo)

Baird, Ian. 1995. Investigation of the Xe Kaman and Xe Xou Rivers, with special reference to freshwater fish and river ecology; and a review of the potential social and environmental impacts of large dam projects being considered for these two rivers in Attapeu province Southern Lao PDR. Report for the Protected Areas Division of the Department of Forestry, Vientiane, Lao PDR.

Baker, Keren Joy. 2013. The phonology of Lyngngam: a Meghalayan Austro-Asiatic language of North-East India. MA thesis, Australian National University. 

Bakshi, Dh. 1945-6. Hindi Angrezi Ho Bhasha Shikshak. I-II. Caibasa

Baldi, Philip (ed.) 1990. Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology. Berlin & New York, Mouton de Gruyter.

Ball, V. 1875. “Nicobarese Hieroglyphics or picture writing.” Indian Antiquary 4:341-42

Banerjee, H.N. 1959. “The Kharia of Modhupur, Singhbhum District and Neighbouring Regions.” Bulletin of the Department of Anthropology 8/2:91-102

Banerjee, H.N. 1962. “Socio-Ritual Status of the Kharia in the Ethnic Background of Manbhum.” Bulletin of the Cultural Research Institute, West Bengal, 1/2:16-28

Banker, Elizabeth M. 1964. Bahnar Affixation. Mon-Khmer Studies 1:99-117.

Banker, Elizabeth M., Sip and Mơ. 1973. Bahnar Language Lessons (Pleiku Province). Trilingual Language Lessons, No. 20. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Banker, Elizabeth. 1964. "Bahnar Affixation." Mon-Khmer Studies, 1: 99-117.

Banker, John E. 1961. Bahnar Phonology. Vietnam Linguistic Papers. Saigon, Summer Institute of Linguistics, p.15.

Banker, John E. 1965. Bahnar word classes. MA thesis, The Hartford Seminary Foundation.

Banker, John E. 1978. Bahnar word classes. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications.

Banker, John, Elizabeth Banker & Siu Mo'. 1979. Bahnar Dictionary, Plei Bong-Mang Yang Dialect. Huntingdon Beach, Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Bannerjee, G.Ch. 1894. Introduction to the Kharia Language. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat press.

Baradat, R. 1941. Les dialectes des tribus sâmrê. Manuscrit de l’Ecole Française d’Extrême-Orient, Paris. 267p.

Baradat, R. 1941. Les sâ̆mre ou Peâ̆r, population primitive de l’Ouest du Cambodge. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 41:1-150.

Bareh, Curiously. 2007. A Descriptive Analysis of the Jowai and Rymbai Dialects of Khasi. PhD thesis North-Eastern Hills University, Shillong, India. 

Bareh, Hamlet. 1969. A short history of Khasi Literature. Shillong: Don Bosco Press

Bareh, Hamlet. 1977. The Languages and Literatures of Meghalaya. Simla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study

Bareh, V. Mondon. 1929. Khasi-English Course and Grammar for Schools and Colleges. Shillong

Barker, Milton E. & Muriel A. Barker 1970. Proto-Vietnamuong (Annamuong) final consonants and vowels. Lingua 24.3:268-285.

Barker, Milton E. & Muriel A. Barker 1976. Muong-Vietnamese-English Dictionary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics (microfiche).

Barker, Milton E. 1963. Proto-Vietnamuong initial labial consonants. Văn-hoa Nguyêt-san 12.3:491-500.

Barker, Milton E. 1966. Vietnamese and Mương tone correspondences. In Norman Herbert Zide (ed.) Studies in comparative Austroasiatic linguistics. N. Zide (ed.), The Hague, Mouton. pp.9-25. 

Barker, Miriam. 1993. Bibliography of Mường and other Vietic language groups, with notes. Mon-Khmer Studies 23:197-243. 

Baron, Stephan. 1973. The classifier-alone-plus-noun construction as areal feature in Southeast Asia. Paper presented at the Sixth International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistic Studies, San Diego, California.

Barr, Julie and Eric Pawley. 2013. Bahnaric Language Cluster Survey of Mondul Kiri and Kratie Provinces, Cambodia. SIL International, Electronic Survey Report 2013-001.

Barron, A. M. Turner, L. Beeching, P. Bellwood, P. Piper, E. Grono, R. Jones, M. Oxenham, N.K.T. Kien, T. Senden and T.P. Denham. 2017. MicroCT reveals domesticated rice (Oryza sativa) within pottery sherds from early Neolithic sites (4150-3265 cal BP) in Southeast Asia. Scientific Reports 7: 7410. DOI:10.1038/s41598-017-04338-9.

Bars, Rev. E. 1973. Khasi-English Dictionary. Shillong: Don Bosco.

Bastian, Adolf. 1868. Reise durch Kambodja nach Cochinchina, tome 3. Herman Gostenoble, Jena. [samreh 89-90 ; khamen boran 264-265; xong 295-298].

Bastian, Adolf. 1868. Reise durch Kambodja nach Cochinchina. Die Voelker des oestlichen Asien: Studien und Reisen von Dr. Adolf Bastian, Vierter Band. Jena, Herman Costenoble, reprinted 1967 by Oxford University Press, Kuala Lumpur

Bates, Jennifer, Cameron Petrie, Ravindra Nath Singh. 2017. Approaching rice domestication in South Asia: New evidence from Indus settlements in northern India. Journal of Archaeological Science 78: 193-201. doi.org/10.1016/j.jas.2016.04.018.

Bätscher, Kevin. 2014. Mlabri. In Jenny, Mathias and Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages (2 vols.). Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp. 1003–1030. 

Bauer, Christian. 1982 Morphology and Syntax of Spoken Mon. PhD Dissertation, University of London. 

Bauer, Christian. 1983. Classifiers in Mon? 15th annual meeting of the Australian Linguistic Society. Melbourne, Latrobe Universit, August 31 – September 2, 1983.

Bauer, Christian. 1984 Early Mon ecology – Linguistic evidence. 5th National conference of the Asian Studies Association of Australia. University of Adelaide, May 13-18, 1984.

Bauer, Christian. 1984. A guide to Mon studies. Working Papers, Monash University.

Bauer, Christian. 1984. Existence, Possession and Negation in Mon. 16th annual meeting of the Australian Linguistic Society. Alice Springs, August 29 – September 2, 1984.

Bauer, Christian. 1984. Khmer and Mon relative clauses. An historical study. 16th annual meeting of the Australian Linguistic Society. Alice Springs, August 29 – September 2, 1984.

Bauer, Christian. 1984. Old Mon kinship terminology. Colloquy on South East Asia in the 9th to 14th centuries. Canberra, Australian National University, May 9-12, 1984.

Bauer, Christian. 1984. The verb complex in spoken Mon. in: Theraphan THONGKHAM & Gérard DIFFLOTH, eds. , Mon and Nyah Kur Linguistic Studies. Bangkok, Chulalongkorn UP, [in press].

Bauer, Christian. 1985. A Grammer of spoken Mon. Wiesbaden, Harrassowitz.

Bauer, Christian. 1988. Khmer Nasal Affixes: Old Mon Borrowing or Proto-Mon-Khmer Retentions? In The International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, edited by Cholticha Bamroongraks et al.. Bangkok, Thailand, 248-257. Thammasat University.

Bauer, Christion 1992. Mon–Aslian contacts. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 55: 532–537.

Bauer, Robert. 1992. Winkin’, blinkin’, and nod; A study in historical-comparative semantics of Southeast Asian languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 15.2:151-184.

Behr, Wolfgang. 2009. Classifiers, lexical tone, determinatives: a look at their emergence and diachrony in Old Chinese and beyond. Handout from Diachrony of CLF Workshop, NIAS Wassenaar. 

Bellina, Bérénice (ed.). 2017. Khao Sam Kaeo: An Early Port-City between the Indian Ocean and the South China Sea. EFEO Mémoires archéologiques, Numéro de collection: 28. ISBN-13 : 978 2 85539 427 5 

Bellwood, Peter 2005. First Farmers: The Origins of Agricultural Societies. Oxford: Blackwell.

Bellwood, Peter. 2013, Neolithic migrations: food production and population expansion, in Peter Bellwood (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Global Human Migration Volume 1 Prehistory, Wiley-Blackwell, Oxford United Kingdom, pp. 79-86.

Bellwood, Peter. 2015. Vietnam and the Prehistory of Eastern Asia- a Multidisciplinary Perspective on the Neolithic. Andreas Reinecke (ed.) Perspectives on the Archaeology of Vietnam. Bonn, German Archaeological Institute - Berlin/ Bonn. pp. 47-80 (in English and Vietnamese).

Bellwood, Peter. 2021. Homelands and dispersal histories of Mainland Southeast Asian language families: a multidisciplinary perspective. In Paul Sidwell and Mathias Jenny (eds.) The Languages and Linguistics of Mainland Southeast Asia: a comprehensive guide. Berlin/Boston; De Gruyter Mouton. pp. 33-44.

Bender, Byron W. and Judith W. Wang, 1985. The status of Proto-Micronesian. In, Pawley, Andrew, and Lois Carrington, eds. Austronesian Linguistics at the 15th Pacific Science Congress. (Pacific Linguistics C-88) 53-92, Canberra: Australian National University.

Bender, Byron W., 1971. Micronesian languages, in Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Linguistics in Oceania. Current Trends in Linguistics (8), 426- 465. The Hague: Mouton.

Bender, Byron W., ed. 1984. Studies in Micronesian linguistics. (Pacific Linguistics C-80), Canberra: Australian National University.

Benedict, Paul K. 1942. Thai, Kadai, and Indonesian. A new alignment in Southeast Asia. American Antropologist, 44:576-601. 

Benedict, Paul K. 1947. An Analysis of Annamese Kinship Terms. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 3:371-92. 

Benedict, Paul K. 1972. Sino-Tibetan: A Conspectus. New York, Cambridge University Press.

Benedict, Paul K. 1975. Austro-Thai Language and Culture, with a glossary of roots. New Haven: Human Relations Area Files Press.

Benedict, Paul K. 1976. Austro-Thai and Austroasiatic. Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part I:1-36 

Benedict, Paul K. 1989-90. Austroasiatic loanwords in Sino-Tibetan. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal, 18-19:1-13.

Benedict, Paul K. 1990. How To Tell Lai: An Exercise in Classification. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area, 13(2): 1-26.

Benedict, Paul K. 1990. Japanese/Austro-Tai. Ann Arbor: Karoma Publishers. 

Bengtson, John and Merritt Ruhlen. 1994. Global Etymologies. In Ruhlen (1994), pp 277-336.

Bengtson, John. 1991. Macro-Caucasic Phonology (Part 1). In Shevoroshkin (ed.) 1991, pp142-157.

Bengtson, John. 1993. The Macro-Caucasic Hypothesis. Dhumbadji!. 1.2:3-6.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1967. Temiar religion. PhD thesis, Cambridge University.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1976. Austroasiatic Subgroupings and Prehistory in the Malay Peninsula. In Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press (Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications No. 13). pp: 37-128.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1976b. An outline of Temiar grammar. In Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press (Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications No. 13). Pp: 129-188.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1997. Issues in the ethnohistory of Pahang. In: Nik Hassan Shuhaimi bin Nik Abdul Rahman, Mohamed Mokhtar Abu Bakar, Ahmad Hakimi Khairuddin & Jazamuddin Baharuddin (eds), Pembangunan Arkeologi Pelancongan Negeri Pahang, Pekan: Muzium Pahang, pp. 82–121. 

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1997a. Affixes, Austronesian and Iconicity in Malay. National University of Singapore, Department of Sociology Working Paper No. 132. To appear in volume from Monograph Series on Asian Linguistics, edited by David Gil and James T Collins. London: Curzon Press.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 1997b. "Issues in the ethnohistory of Pahang." In Pembangunan arkeologi pelancongan Negeri Pahang, ed. Nik Hassan Shuhaimi bin Nik Abdul Rahman, Mohamed Mokhtar Abu Bakar, Ahmad Hakimi Khairuddin and Jazamuddin Baharuddin, pp. 82-121. Pekan: Muzium Pahang.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 2005. "The current situation of the Aslian languages." Paper originally presented at the Fourth ASEAN Inter-University Seminar on Social Development, Pattani, Thailand, 16-18 June 1999. Revised full version to appear in Endangered Languages and Literatures of Southeast Asia, ed. by Hein Steinhauer and James T. Collins. Leiden: KITLV Press (Royal Institute of Ethnography and Linguistics).

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 2009a. Non-Malay Austronesian loanwords in Aslian. Paper presented at the Workshop on Loanwords in the Asian Context. Division of Linguistics and Multilingual Studies, Nanyang Technological University, 9 March 2009. 

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 2011. The current situation of the Aslian languages: updated and expanded version. Manuscript circulated electronically June 2011. 

Benjamin, Geoffrey. 2012. The Aslian languages of Malaysia and Thailand: an assessment. Language Documentation and Description 11:136-230.

Benjamin, Geoffrey. In press. The current situation of the Aslian languages. In (Hein Steinhauer & James T. Collins eds., Endangered languages of Southeast Asia. London, School of Oriental and African Studies.

Benveniste, Emile. 1935. Origines de la formation des noms en indo-européen. Paris, Adrien-Maisonneuve.

Bequette, Rebecca Lee Elaine. 2008. Participant Reference, Deixis, and Anaphora in Bunong Narrative Discourse. MA thesis, Graduate Institute of Applied Linguistics, Ducanville Texas.

Bergman, T. G. ed. 1990. Survey Reference Manual. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Bergsland, K., & H. Vogt. 1962. On the validity of glottochronology. Current Anthropology 3: 111-153. 

Berlin, Brent. 1977. Speculations on the growth of ethnobotanical nomenclature. In Benjamin Blount and Mary Sanches, (eds.). Sociocultural Dimensions of Language Change. New York, Academic Press, pp 62-102.

Bhaduri, M.B. 1931. A Mundari-English Dictionary. Calcutta

bhagat, sure´s. 1995. “bihâr ke kha.riyâ janjâti ke bîc ´saik.sa.nik sthiti.” Bulletin of Bihar Tribal Welfare Research Institute, Ranchi. XXXV, December 1995: 72-74

Bhat, D.N.S. 1997. “Noun-Verb Distinction in Munda Languages” Anvita Abbi (ed.). Languages of Tribal and Indigenous Peoples of India: The Ethnic Space. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass. 227-51

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. “Field-notes on Nahali.” Indian Linguistics 17:245-58

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1954. “Studies in the Parengi Language.” Indian Linguistics, 14:45-63

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1965. “Glottal Stop and Checked Consonants in Bonda.” Indo-Iranian Journal 9:69-71

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1966. “Some Munda etymologies.” Norman H. Zide (ed.). Studies in Comparative Austroasiatic Lingusitics. The Hague: Mouton. 28-40

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1968. A Bonda Dictionary. Poona: Deccan College (Building Centenary and Silver Jubilee Series 18)

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1969. “Some More Munda Etymologies.” Pratidaanam, Indian, Iranian and Indo-European Studies presented to F.B.J. Kuiper. The Hague. 362-70

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1970. “Kinship Terms in Munda Languages.” Anthropos 65.3-4:444-65

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1972. “Dravidian and Munda: A Good Field for Areal and Typological Studies.” III Seminar on Dravidian Linguistics, Annamalai University, 241-65

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1975. “A new classification of Munda” Indo-Iranian Journal 17:97-101

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1975. “Linguistic convergence in the Dravido-Munda culture area” International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 4:199-214

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1975. Studies in Comparative Munda Linguistics. Simla: Indian Institute of Advanced Study

Bhattacharya, Sudhibhushan. 1976. “Gender in the Munda Languages.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part I:189-211 

Bhattacharya, Sudhibushan. 1966. Some Munda etymologies. Zide, N. (ed.) (1966), pp 28-40.

Bhol, Lata & Paramananda Patel. 1992. Ho. [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Harijan & Tribal Welfare Department, Tribal Language Study Series, XI) (in Oriya)

Bible Society of India, Pakistan and Ceylon. 1951. Yohana?likha sukho kayom, The Gospel according to St. John (in Kharia). Calcutta

Biggs Bruce, D.S. Walsh and Jocelyn Woqa, 1966. Proto-Polynesian Reconstructions with English to Proto-Polynesian finder list. Working Papers in Linguistics. Aukland, Department of Anthropology, University of Auckland.

Biggs, Bruce, 1965. Direct and indirect inheritance in Rotuman. Lingua, 383- 415.

Biligiri, H.S. 1965. Kharia: phonology, grammar, vocabulary. Poona: Deccan College.

Biligiri, H.S. 1965. The Sora verb: a restricted study. G.B. Milner and Eugénie J.A. Henderson (eds.). Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies, Part II: Descriptive Linguistics. Amsterdam: North-Holland Publishing Company

Bird, Steven & Gary Simons. 2003. Seven dimensions of portability for language documentation and description. Language 79.3:557–582.

Bisang, Walter. 1992. Das Verb im Chinesischen, Hmong, Vietnamesischen, Thai und Khmer: vergleichende Grammatik im Rahmen der Verbserialisierung, der Grammatikalisierung und der Attraktorpositionen. Tübingen: Genter Narr.

Bisang, Walter. 1996. Areal typology and grammaticalization: processes of grammaticalization based on nouns and verbs in South-East Asian languages. Stud. Lang. 20:519–97.

Bisang, Walter. 2014. Modern Khmer. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp.677-716. 

Bishop, Nancy M. 1996. "A preliminary description of Kensiw (Maniq) phonology." Mon-Khmer Studies 25: 227-53.

Bishop, Nancy N. & Mary M. Peterson. 1994. A selective Aslian bibliography. Mon-Khmer Studies 24:161-69.

Bishop, Nancy N. & Mary M. Peterson. 1994. Kensiw glossary. Mon-Khmer Studies 23:163-195.

Biswas, A.K. 1995. “Santhal Rebellion: - A study of little known facts of their life and culture.” Bulletin of Bihar Tribal Welfare Research Institute, Ranchi. XXXV, December 1995:13-24

Bitard, Pierre. 1952. “Carte ethno-linguistic de le région de voeunsai (Cambodge)” Bulletin de la Société des études indochinoises 27.1:5-7

Bitard, Pierre. 1956. “Note sur le môn et dialects môn-khmèrs (Etudes khmèrs)” Bulletin de la Société des études indochinoises 31.1:303-8

Blagden, C.O. 1906. Language and Comparative vocabulary of Aboriginal dialects: In Skeat and Blagden Pagan Races of the Malay Peninsula, Vol. 2. London: Macmillan. pp. 379-472; 481-775.

BLAGDEN, Charles Otto & MAUNG TIN 1928. Talaing inscription in a bell cast by Anauppetlun Min. JBRS 18. 21-34.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1894. Early Indo-Chinese influence in the Malay Peninsula, as illustrated by some of the dialects of the aboriginals. Journal of the Straits Branch, Royal Asiatic Society 27:21-56.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1903. The comparative philology of the Sakai and Semang dialects of the Malay Peninsula—a review. Journal of the Straits Branch, Royal Asiatic Society 39:47-63. 

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1909. The Talaing inscription of Myazeti pagoda at Pagan, with a few remarks on the other versions. JRAS 1017-1052.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1910. A further note on the inscriptions of the Myazedi pagoda, Pagan, and other inscriptions throwing light on them. JRAS 797-812.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1910. Quelques notions sur la phonétique du talain et son evolution historique. Journal Asiatique 15.477-505.

Blagden, Charles otto. 1912. [Old Mon epigraphy] [in: Minutes] JBRS 2.1.134-135; discussion pp. 135-137

Blagden, Charles otto. 1912. Notes on Talaing epigraphy. JBRS 2. 38-43.

Blagden, Charles otto. 1912. Some Talaing inscriptions on glazed tiles. JRAS 689-698.

Blagden, Charles otto. 1912. Two corrected readings in the Myazedi (Talaing) inscription. JRAS 486-487.

Blagden, Otto. 1913. The classification of the Annamese language. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, pp. 427-432.

Blagden, Charles otto. 1914. Etymological notes: (1) Talaing, (2) Mon and Râmaññadesa. JBRS 4.57-60.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1914. The Myazedi inscription. JRAS 1063-1069.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1915. Etymological notes: (1) Mara’s daughters, (2) The daughters of Mara in the Mon tradition. JBRS 5.30-31,97-98.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1915. Etymological notes: (5) Krit, (6) Thaton, (7) Mon, Rman, Râmañña, (9) on certain Mon words. JBRS 5.25-27,28-30.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1923. Epigraphia Birmanica [Vol. 3, part 1: Môn inscriptions IX-XI]. Rangoon, Government Printing.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1928. Epigraghia Birmanica [Vol. 3, part 2: Môn inscriptions. Section 2: The medieval Môn records. XII: The inscriptions of the Kalyân?nîsîmâ, Pegu]. Rangoon Government Printing

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1929. Achinese and Mon-Khmer. Bataviaasch Genootschap van Kunsten en Wetenschappen Feestbundel: bij Gelegenheld van zijn 150 Jarig Bestaan, 1778-1928. Vol.1, pp.35-38.

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1934. Epigraphia Birmanica [Vol. 4, part 1]. Rangoon, Government Printing. [Mon inscriptions XIII-XVIII; cover dated as part 2 [1936]; edited by U Mya]

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1936. Epigraphia Birmanica [Vol. 4, part 2]. Rangoon, Government Printing. [Mon inscriptions XIII-XVIII; plates 1-11 in portfolio]

Blagden, Charles Otto. 1940. Certain words of the Pegu language. JBRS 30.371-375. [discussion of 55 Mon words listed in a 17th c. pamphlet in the Bodleian Library, Oxford]

Blah, Hari. 1931. “Notes on the Khasis and Syntengs.” Census of India, Vol. II, Part I

Blah, U.E. 1970. Khasi self teacher. Shillong

Blah, U.E. 1971. Chapala’s Anglo-Khasi Dictionary. Second edition. Shillong: Chapala Book Stall

Blair, Frank. 1990. Survey on a shoestring: A manual for small-scale language surveys. Dallas: 

Blazhek, Vaclav. 2000. Comments on Hayes "The Austric Denti-alveolar Sibilants". Mother Tongue V:15-17. 

Blench, Roger and Paul Sidwell. 2011. Is Shom Pen a Distinct Branch of Austroasiatic? In Sophana Srichampa, Paul Sidwell & Kenneth Gregerson (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies: papers from the ICAAL4: Mon-Khmer Studies Journal Special Issue No. 3. Dallas, SIL International; Canberra, Pacific Linguistics; Salaya, Mahidol University. pp. 90–101

Blench, Roger M. & M.Spriggs eds. 1997. Archaeology and Language I: theoretical and methodological orientations. London: Routledge.

Blench, Roger M. 2005. From the mountains to the valleys: understanding ethnolinguistic geography in SE Asia. In: Sagart, L. Blench, R.M. & A. Sanchez-Mazas, (eds.) Perspectives on the Phylogeny of East Asian Languages. London: Curzon Press.

Blench, Roger M. 2006. Archaeology, Language, and the African Past. AltaMira Press.

Blench, Roger M. 2007. The language of the Shom Pen: a language isolate in the Nicobar Islands. Mother Tongue XII: 179-202

Blench, Roger M. 2008. Stratification in the peopling of China: how far does the linguistic evidence match genetics and archaeology? In: Alicia Sanchez-Mazas, Blench, R.M., Ross, M.D., I. Peiros & Marie Lin eds. Human migrations in continental East Asia and Taiwan. Matching archaeology, linguistics and genetics. 105-132. London: Routledge.

Blench, Roger M. 2009. Are there four additional unrecognised branches of Austroasiatic? Presentation at ICAAL-4. Bangkok, October 29-30, 2009.

Blench, Roger M. 2010. Was there an Austroasiatic presence in island SE Asia prior to the Austronesian expansion? Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association 30:133-144.

Blench, Roger M. 2018. Waterworld: lexical evidence for aquatic subsistence strategies in Austroasiatic. In Hiram ring and Felix Rau (eds.) Papers from the Seventh International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (JSEALS Special Publication No. 3). Manoa: University of Hawaii Press. pp.174-193.

Blench, Roger M. in press. The expansion of the Daic peoples: cultural and iconographic correlations. Presentation at the XIVth EURASEAA meeting. Leiden, September 2008.

Blench, Roger M. in press. Vernacular names for taro in the Indo-Pacific region and their possible implications for centres of diversification. Paper submitted for a special IPPA volume on wet taro systems. David Addison & Matthew Spriggs eds.

Blok, Gregory Robert. 2013. A Descriptive Grammar of Eastern Lawa. MA thesis, Payap University, Thailand.

Blood, Doris Walker 1962. Reflexes of Proto-Malayo-Polynesian in Cham. Anthropological Linguistics, 4.9:11-20.

Blood, Evangeline. 1976. Eastern Mnong Vocabulary: Eastern Mnong-Vietnamese-English Thesaurus (a computer print-out). Huntington Beach, California, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Blood, Henry F. 1963. "The vowel system of Uon Njuin Mnong Rolom."

Blood, Henry F. 1966. A Reconstruction of Proto-Mnong (Including Tentative Reconstruction of Proto-South-Bahnaric). M.A. Thesis, Indiana University.

Blood, Henry F. 1976. "The phonemes of Uon Njuñ Mnong Rơlơm." 

Blood, Henry F. and Evangeline Blood. 1969. "The origin of Dak Nue: a Mnong Rolom legend obtained from Muom Nom." 

Bloomfield, Leonard. 1933. Language. New York, Holt, Reinhard & Winston.

Blust, Robert 1996. Beyond the Austronesian homeland: The Austric hypothesis and its implications for archaeology. In: Prehistoric Settlement of the Pacific, ed. by Ward H.Goodenough, 117-137. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society 86.5. 

Blust, Robert A., 1972. Proto- Oceanic addenda with cognates in non- Oceanic Austronesian languages: a preliminary list. University of Hawaii Working Papers in Linguistics, 1- 44.

Blust, Robert A., 1978a. Eastern Malayo-Polynesian: a subgrouping argument. In, Wurm, S.A. and Lois Carrington, (eds.), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, fascicle I. Western Austronesian. (Pacific Linguistics C-61), Canberra: Australian National University.

Blust, Robert A., 1978b. The Proto- Oceanic Palatals. Memoirs of the Polynesian Society. Wellington: The Polynesian Society.

Blust, Robert A., 1984. More on the position of the languages of eastern Indonesia. Oceanic Linguistics, 22-23:1-28.

Blust, Robert. 1977. The Proto-Austronesian pronouns and Austronesian subgrouping: A preliminary report. Working Papers in Linguistics 9.2: 1-15. University of Hawaii.

Blust, Robert. 1988. Austronesian Root Theory. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Blust, Robert A. 1996. Beyond the Austronesian homeland: the Austric hypothesis and its implications for archaeology. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, New Series 86.5: 117–158. 

Blust, Robert. 1997. "Nasals and nasalization in Borneo." Oceanic Linguistics 36 (1): 149-179.

Blust, Robert. 1998. Ca- Reduplication and Proto-Austronesian Grammar. Oceanic Linguistics 37: 29-64.

Blust, Robert. 2009. The Austronesian Languages. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.

Blust, Robert A. 2019. The Austronesian Homeland and Dispersal. Annual Review of Linguistics 5.1:417-434.

Blust, Robert. 2000. Comments on Hayes, "The Austric Denti-alveolar Sibilants". Mother Tongue V:19-21. 

Blust, Robert. 2017. The Linguistic History of Austronesian‐speaking Communities in Island Southeast Asia. In Peter Bellwood. 2017. First islanders: prehistory and human migration in island Southeast Asia. Hoboken: John Wiley & Sons. pp.190-197.

Blust, Robert. 2019. The Austronesian Homeland and Dispersal. Annual Review of Linguistics. 5:417-434. 

Bochet, Gilbert and Jacques Dournes, 1953, Lexique polyglotte (viêtnamien, köho, röglai, français). Saigon: Éditions France-Asie. 

Bodding, P.O. 1922. Materials for a Santali grammar, I (mostly phonetic). Dumka: Santal Mission of the Northern Churches

Bodding, P.O. 1925-29. Santal Folk Tales. Oslo: H. Aschehough & Co.[Reprint: 1997. New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House]

Bodding, P.O. 1929. A Santali grammar for beginners. Benagaria: Santal Mission of the Northern Churches

Bodding, P.O. 1929. Materials for a Santali grammar, II (mostly morphological). Dumka: Santal Mission of the Northern Churches

Bodding, P.O. 1929-1936. A Santali dictionary (5 volumes). Oslo: I Kommisjon Hos Jacob Dybwab (Norwegian Academy of Science and Letters)

BOELES, J. J. 1964. The king of Srî Dvâravatî and his regalia. The Journal of the Siam Society 52. 99-114.

Bomhard, Allen R. & John C. Kerns. 1994. The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship. Berlin & New York, Mouton de Gruyter.

Bomhard, Allen R. 1984. Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic. Amsterdam, John Benjamins.

Bompas, Cecil Henry (translator). Reprint: 2001. Folklore of the Santal Parganas. Translated by Cecil Henry Bompas. New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House (No data on first publication available)

Bon, Noëllie. 2014. Une Grammaire de la langue stieng. Doctoral thesis, Université Lumière Lyon 2.

Bondet De La Bernadie, J. 1949. Le Dialecte des Kha Boloven. Bulletin de la Société des Études Indochinoises. 24:57-78.

Boontiam, Kotchakorn. 1991. “Expressives in Northern Khmer / คำเสริมสร้อยในภาษาเขมรถิ่นไทย.” M.A. thesis, Mahidol University.

Bos, Kees Jan and Paul Sidwell. 2014. Kui Ntua. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp. 837-880.

Boutin, Michael E. 2000. "The role of /l/ in blocking nasal spread in Bonggi." Borneo 2000: Language, Management and Tourism. Proceedings of the Sixth Biennial Borneo Research Conference, ed. Michael Leigh, 170-88. Kuching: Institute of East Asian Studies, Universiti Malaysia Sarawak.

Boutin, Michael E. 2002. "Blocking nasal spread in Bonggi." Papers from the Tenth Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2000, ed. Marlys Macken, 97-114. Tempe, AZ: Program for Southeast Asian Studies, Arizona State University.

Bowden, John, 1992. Behind the preposition: grammaticalisation of locatives in Oceanic languages. (Pacific Linguistics B-107), Canberra: Australian National University.

Bradley, D., R. J. LaPolla, B. Michailovsky and G. Thurgood, Eds. 2003. Language Variation: Papers on Variation and Change in the Sinosphere and in the Indosphere in Honour of James A. Matisoff. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Bradley, David 1997. What did they eat? Grain crops of the Burmic peoples. Mon-Khmer Studies, 27:161-170.

Bradley, David. 1993. Map of Southeast Asian Languages, in Christopher Moseley and R.E. Asher (eds.) Atlas of the World's Languages. London & New York, Routledge, pp159-167.

Bradley-Birt. 1905. The Story of an Indian Upland. London: Smith, Elder & Co.

Braine, Jean (Critchfield). 1970. Nicobarese Grammar (Car Dialect). PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.

Braine, Jean C. 1976. “Numeration in Car Nicobarese.” Linguistics, an International Review

Brengues, Docteur Jean. 1905. Notes sur les populations de la région des montagnes des Cardamomes. The Journal of the Siam Society 2(1): 19-47.

Brengues, Jean. 1905. Note sur les populations de la région des montagnes des Cardamones. Journal of the Siam Society 2:19-47.

BRIGGS, L. P. 1945. Dvâravatî, the most ancient kingdom of Siam. JAOS 65. 98-107.

Briggs, Lawrence Palmer. 1951. The Ancient Khmer Empire. Transactions Of The American Philosophical Society, 41.1

Brightbill, Jeremy, Amy Kim, and Seung Kim. 2007. The War-Jaintia in Bangladesh: a sociolinguistic survey SIL Electronic Survey Reports.

Brunelle, Marc. 2005. Register in Eastern Cham: Phonological, phonetic and sociolinguistic approaches. PhD diss., Cornell University.

Brunelle, Marc. 2005. Register in Eastern Cham: phonological, phonetic and sociolinguistic factors. Doctoral Dissertation, Cornell.

Buakaw, Supakit (ศุภกิต บัวขาว). 2012. “A Phonological Study of Palaung Dialects Spoken in Thailand and Myanmar, with Focuses on Vowels and Final Nasals / ระบบเสียงภาษาปะหล่องที่พูดในประเทศไทยและพม่า.” Mahidol University.

BUCHANAN, Francis. 1799. A comparative vocabulary of some of the languages spoken in the Burma Empire. Asiatick Researcher 5. 219-240. [pp. 235-236, Mon word-list]

Bùi Khánh Thế. 2000. The Phong language of the Ethnic Phong which live near the Melhir Muong Pon Megalith in Laos. In  Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: the fifth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics. National University Ho Chi Minh City. pp. 199-253.

Bulbeck, David 2008. An integrated perspective on the Austronesian diaspora: the switch from cereal agriculture to maritime foraging in the colonisation of island SE Asia. Australian Archaeology, 67:31-52.

Bulbeck, F 2004, 'An Integrated Perspective on Orang Asli Ethnogenesis', in Victor Paz (ed.), Southeast Asian Archaeology, University of the Philippines Press, The Philippines, pp. 366-399. 

Bunphan, Jaroon (จรูญ บุญพันธ์). 1982. “Causativization in Nyah Kur / วิธีการทำเป็นการีตในภาษาญัฮกุร.” Thesis, Chulalongkorn University. http://cuir.car.chula.ac.th/handle/123456789/17950.

Burenhult , Niclas and Claudia Wegener. 2009. Preliminary Notes on the Phonology, Orthography and Vocabulary of Semnam (Austroasiatic, Malay Peninsula). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. 1:283-312

Burenhult, Niclas & Claudia Wegener. 2009. Preliminary Notes on the Phonology, Orthography, and Vocabulary of Semnam. Austroasiatic, Malay Peninsula). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1:283-311 

Burenhult, Niclas. 2002. A Grammar of Jahai. Ph.D. thesis. Lund University: Department of Linguistics.

Burenhult, Niclas. 2005. A grammar of Jahai. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. 

Burnham, Eugene C. 1976. The Place of Haroi in the Chamic Languages. M.A. thesis, University of Texas at Arlington.

Burrows, Lionel. 1915 [Reprint: 1980]. The gramar of the Ho Language. An Eastern Hialayan dialect. Delhi: Cosmo.

Burton, Eva. 1969. A brief sketch of Cua clause structure. Mon-Khmer Studies 3:5-8.

Butler, Becky. 2014. Bunong. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.). The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp. 719-745.

Cabaton, Antoine. 1905. Dix dialectes indochinois recueillis par Prosper Oden'hal. Etude linguistique par Antoine Cabatone. Journal Asiatique, Dixième série, tome V:265-344.

Cadiere, Léopold. 1905. Les Hautes Vallées du Sòng-Gianh. Bulletin de l’Ecole française d’Extrême-Orient 1:349-367. 

Caldararo, Niccolo. 2015. Beyond Zero Population: Ethnohistory, Archaeology and the Khmer, Climate Change and the Collapse of Civilizations. Anthropology 3:154. doi:10.4172/2332-0915.1000154.

Campbell, A. & R.M. Macphail. 1933. A Santali-English and English-Santali Dictionary. Pokhuria: Santal Mission Press

Campbell, A. 1899-1902. A Santali-English Dictionary. 3 parts. Pokhuria: Santal Mission Press

Campbell, A. 1905. English-Santali; Index to Santali-English Dictionary. Pokhuria: Santal Mission Press

Campbell, G. 1866. “The Ethnography of India (Appendix 2: Santal vocabulary)”. JASB 35/2:1-52

CAMPBELL, George. 1874. Specimens of languages of India, including those of the aboriginal tribes of Bengal, the Central Provinces, and the Eastern frontier. Calcutta, Bengal Secretariat Press. [Mon vocabulary 286-303]

Campbell, Sir C. 1874. Specimen of the languages of India, including those of the aboriginal tribes of Bengal, the central provinces and the Eastern Frontier. Calcutta (Khasi vocabulary on pp. 220ff, 272ff.) 

Cao, Xuân Hạo. 1992. Some Preliminaries to the Syntactic Analysis of the Vietnamese Sentence. Mon-Khmer Studies 20:137-152. 

Capell, Arthur, 1943. The Linguistic Position of South- Eastern Papua. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Company.

Capell, Arthur, 1971. The Austronesian languages of Australian New Guinea. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.) 1971. Linguistics in Oceania. Current Trends in Linguistics (8), 240-340. The Hague: Mouton.

Capell, Arthur, 1976. General picture of Austronesian languages, New Guinea area, in Wurm, S.A. (ed.), New Guinea Area Languages and Language Study, Vol. 2: Austronesian Languages. Pacific Linguistics (C- 38), 5- 52. Canberra, Australian National University.

Carey, H. J. Iskandr. 1961. Tengleq Kui Serok: A Study of the Temiar Language with an Ethnographic Summary. Kuala Lumpur, Dewan Bahasa dan Pustaka.

Carey, H.J. Iskandr. 1970. A Mendrik vocabulary. Federation Museums Journal (new series), 15:185-91.

Casad, Eugene. 1974. Dialect intelligibility testing. Norman, Oklahoma: Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Casali, Roderic. 1996. Resolving Hiatus. Los Angeles: Ph.D. dissertation, UCLA.

Cassaigne, Jean. 1930. Petit manuel de conversation courante en langue moï (Koho et Chau Sorê) à l'usage des planteurs, classeurs, touristes (région Djiring-Dalat). Tandinh, Saigon, Imprimerie de la Mission.

Castillo, Cristina. 2011. Rice in Thailand: The Archaeobotanical Contribution. Rice 4:114-120. DOI 10.1007/s12284-011-9070-2.

Chamberlain, J. R. 1998. The origin of Sek: implications for Tai and Vietnamese history. In S. Burusphat, (ed) The International Conference on Tai Studies. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University, Bangkok, Thailand, pp. 97-128.

Chamberlain, J. R. 2003. Eco-Spatial History: a nomad myth from the Annamites and its relevance for biodiversity conservation. In X. Jianchu and S. Mikesell, eds. Landscapes of Diversity: Proceedings of the III MMSEA Conference, 25–28 August 2002. Lijiand, P. R. China: Center for Biodiversity and Indigenous Knowledge. 421–436. 

Chamberlain, J. R. 2016. Kra-Dai and the proto-history of South China and Vietnam. Journal of the Siam Society 104:27-77. 

Chang, Laura M. 1998. Thao Reduplication. Oceanic Linguistics 37: 277-297.

Chang, Melody Ya-yin. 1998. WH-Constructions and the Problem of WH-Movement in Tsou. Hsin-Chu, Taiwan: M.A. thesis, Ching-Hwa University.

Chanmekha, Suwaphat. 2003. “The Hidden Language: A Case Study of Kasong Language Attitudes, Useds and Abilities in Three Villages in Trat Province, Thailand =: ภาษาที่ซ่อนอยู่: ศึกษาในกรณีของทัศนคติทางภาษา การใช้ภาษา และความสามารถทางภาษากะซองใน 3 หมู่บ้านในจังหวัดตราด ประเทศไทย.” Mahidol University.

Chantrupanth, Dhanan & Chartchai Phomjakagarin, 1978, Khmer (Surin) - Thai - English Dictionary. Bangkok, Chulalongkorn University.

Chareanraat, Chirat (จิรัฐิ เจริญราษฎร์). 1982. “The Kuay language of Suphanburi / ภาษากวย (ส่วย) ที่จังหวัดสุพรรณบุรี.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55609&language=thai.

Chareontham, Sirikan (สิริกาญจน์ เจริญธรรม). 1987. “A description of the Chong language of Thung-Ta-In, Chanthaburi, an Austroasiatic language in Thailand / ภาษาชอง หมู่บ้านทุ่งตาอิน จังหวัดจันทบุรี.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55908&language=thai.

Charles, Matthew. 1974. Problems in the reconstruction of Proto-Philippine phonology and the subgrouping of the Philippine languages. Oceanic Linguistics 13:457–509.

Charpentier, Jean- Michel, 1982. Atlas Linguistique du Sud- Malakula. Langues et Cultures du Pacifique (2). Paris: SELAF.

Chatmongkol, Lalita (ลลิตา ฉัตรมงคล). 2011. “The construction and selection of identity by the Lawa working in Chiang Mai: a case study of Lawa from Ban Ho, Panghinfon sub-district, Mae Chaem district, Chiang Mai province, Thailand / การสร้างและการเลือกใช้อัตลักษณ์ของชาวละว้าที่เข้ามาทำงานในตัวเมืองเชียงใหม่: กรณีศึกษาชาวละว้าบ้านเฮาะ ตำบลปางหินฝน อำเภอแม่แจ่ม จังหวัดเชียงใหม่.” Mahidol University.

Chatterjee, Suhas. 1963. “On Didei Nouns, Pronouns, Numerals and Demonstratives.” University of Chicago. Unpublished

Chatterjee, Suhas. 1965. “Notes on Gatah.” Unpublished

Chatterji, S.K. 1923. “The Study of Kol.” The Calcutta Review VIII:451-73

Chatterji, Suhas and P.N. Chakravarti. 1963. Gata' Word List. Unpublished mimeograph, 1968. University of Chicago.

Chattopadhyay, Subhash Chandra and Asok Kumar Mukhopadhyay. 2003. The language of the Shompen of Great Nicobar: a preliminary appraisal. Kolkata, Anthropological Survey of India. 

Chaubey, G., Metspalu, M., Choi, Y., Magi, R., Romero, I.G., Rootsi, S., Soares, P., van Oven, M., Behar, D.M., Hudjashov, G., Basu Mallick, C., Karmin, M., Nelis, M., Parik, J., Goverdhana Reddy, A., Metspalu, E., van Driem, G., Xue, Y., Tyler-Smith, C., Thangaraj, K., Singh, L., Remm, M., Richards, M.B., Mirazon Lahr, M., Kayser, M., Villems, R., Kivisild, T., 2010. Population genetic structure in Indian Austroasiatic speakers: the role of landscape barriers and sex-specific admixture. Molecular biology and evolution, DOI:10.1093/molbev/msq28.

Chazée, Laurent. 1999. The Peoples of Laos: Rural and Ethnic Diversities. Bangkok, White Lotus.

Cheeseman, Nathaniel, Elizabeth Hall and Darren Gordon. 2015. Palaungic Linguistic Bibliography. Mon-Khmer Studies 44:i-liv.

Cheeseman, Nathaniel, Jennifer Herington, and Paul Sidwel. 2013. Bahnaric linguistic bibliography with selected annotations. Mon-Khmer Studies 42:xxxiv-xlvii.

Cheeseman, Nathaniel, Paul Sidwel and R. Anne Osborne. 2017. Khmuic Linguistic Bibliography with Selected Annotations. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 10.1:i-xlvi.

Chen Guoqing [陈国庆]. 2005. A Study of Kemie [Kemie yu yan jiu 克蔑语研究]. Beijing: Ethnic Publishing House [民族出版社].

Chén Xiāng-Mù, Wáng Jìng Liú, Làn Yǒng Liáng. 1986. Dé-ángyǔ jiǎnzhì. Beijing, National Minorities Press. (A description of the Ta-ang language, in Chinese).

Chen, Cheng-Fu. 1999. Wh-words as Interrogatives and Indefinites in Rukai. Taipei: M.A. thesis, National Taiwan University. 

Chen, Chi-lu. 1955. Family and marriage of the Budai Rukai of Pingtung, Taiwan. Taipei, Bulletin of the Ethnological Society of China 1: 103-123.

Cheon, M. A.1907. Note sur les dialectes nguon, sac et muong. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 7.1-2: 87-99.

Chetikanon, Chumphon (จุมพล เจติกานนท์). 1972. “Dvaravati inscriptions / จารึกทวาราวดี.” Silpakorn University.

Chew, Grace. 2015. Vietnamese Terms of Address and Person-References: Ideological Change and Stability. Doctoral thesis, University of Huddersfield. 

Chi, Zhang and Hsiao-chun Hung. 2009. The emergence of agriculture in southern China. Antiquity 84:11-25.

CHIT THEIN. 1965. [mun kyaukasa paungchok.] [Mon inscriptions] Rangoon,[ ], 221pp., 112pp. [part 1 text, part 2 translations] [not seen]

Chomsiri, Narissara (นริศรา โฉมศิริ). 2004. “A study of the linguistic and cultural context of Mon names: a case study of the Mon people at Wangka village, Nonglu subdistrict, Sangkhlaburi district, Kanchanaburi province / การศึกษาบริบททางภาษาศาสตร์และวัฒนธรรมของชื่อชาวมอญ: กรณีศึกษาชาวมอญ บ้านวังกะ ตำบลหนองลู อำเภอสังขละบุรี จังหวัดกาญจนบุรี.” Mahidol University.

Chomsky, Noam and Morris Halle. 1968. The sound pattern of English. New York: Harper & Row.

Chong language in Khlong Saeng village, Borrai district, Trat province]

Choo, Marcus. 2009. Katuic Bibliography. Survey Unit, Linguistics Institute, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand. https://li.payap.ac.th/images/stories/survey/KATUIC%20bibliography.pdf 

Choo, Marcus. 2010. Katuic Bibliography with selected annotations. . Survey Unit, Linguistics Institute, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand. https://li.payap.ac.th/images/stories/survey/KATUIC%20bibliography%20with%20selected%20annotations.pdf 

Choo, Marcus. 2012. The Status of Katuic. Survey Unit, Linguistics Institute, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand. https://li.payap.ac.th/images/stories/survey/katuic_languages_status_2.pdf 

Choosi, Isara. 2007. Investigating Contact-Induced Language Change: cases of Chung (Saoch) in Thailand and Cambodia. PhD thesis, Mahidol University, Thailand.

Choosri, Isara. 2002. “Mapping Dialects of Chong in Chanthaburi Province, Thailand: An Application of Geographical Information System (GIS) = แผนที่ภาษาของถิ่นต่างๆ ในจังหวัดจันทบุรี: การประยุกต์ใช้ระบบสารสนเทศภูมิศาสตร์.” Mahidol University.

Choosri, Isara. 2007. “Investigating Contact-Induced Language Change: Cases of Chung (Saoch) in Thailand and Cambodia: การเปลี่ยนแปลงเนื่องจากการสัมผัสภาษา: กรณีภาษาชอุ้ง (สโอจ) ในประเทศไทยและกัมพูชา.” Mahidol University.

Choudhary, Narayan Kumar. 2004. Word Order in Pnar. MA thesis, Jawaharlal Nehru University, India.

Chowdhury, N.N. 1978. The Khasi Canvas. Shillong: Jaya Chowdhury

Chuasuwan, Sudsawad. 1990. “A Phonology of Nyah Kur at Ban Tha Duang, Petchabun Province =: ระบบเสียงภาษาชาวบนบ้านท่าด้วง จังหวัดเพชรบูรณ์.” Mahidol University.

Chuenchom, Am-on (เอมอร ชื่นชม). 1999. “Comparative lexicon of the So language in Sakon Nakhon, Nakhon Phanom and Mukdahan provinces / การศึกษาเปรียบเทียบคำศัพท์ภาษาโซ่ในจังหวัดสกลนคร จังหวัดนครพนม จังหวัดมุกดาหาร.” Silpakorn University.

Churchman, Catherine. The People between the Rivers: The Rise and fall of a Bronze Drum Culture, 200-750 CE. New York: Roman and Littlefield. 

Clark, Marybeth. 1989. Hmong and areal Southeast Asia. In Papers in South-East Asian Linguistics No. 11: South-East Asian Syntax. David Bradley, ed. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. pp. 175-230. 

Clark, Ross, 1973. Transitivity and case in Eastern Oceanic. Oceanic Linguistics 12: 559-606.

Clark, Ross, 1976. Aspects of Proto- Polynesian Syntax. Te Reo Monographs. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Clark, Ross, 1985. Languages of north and central Vanuatu: groups, chains, clusters and waves, in Pawley, Andrew & Lois Carrington (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the 15th Pacific Science Congress. Pacific Linguistics (C- 88), 199- 236. Canberra: Australian National University.

Clements, George N., and Engin Sezer. 1982. Vowel and consonant disharmony in Turkish. The structure of phonological representations (part II), ed. by Harry van der Hulst and Norvil Smith, 213-55. Dordrecht: Foris.

Clements, George N., and Samuel Jay Keyser. 1983. CV phonology: A generative theory of the syllable. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.

Coady, James, and Richard McGinn. 1982. "On the so-called implosive nasals of Rejang." In GAVA: Studies in Austronesian Languages and Culture, ed. Rainer Carle et al., pp. 437-449. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer Verlag.

Codrington, Robert, 1885. The Melanesian Languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Coédès, G. 1964. Les Môns de Dvâravatî. Esseys offered to G.H. Luce, Artibus Asiae 2: 112-7, Ascona

COEDES, G[eorge]. 1965. In search of the kingdom of Dvâravatî. The Guardian [Rangoon] 12 November 1965. 39-46. [transl. by Vivian Ba; original in archaeologia 1.1.1964. not seen]

Coedes, George & Loius Malleret. 1962. Le cycle des douze animaux dans la vie des cambodgiens. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient. Tome. 50.2.[PAGES??]

COEDES, George. 1929. Recueil des inscriptions du Siam. Deuxième partie: Insriptions de Dvâravatî, de çrîvijaya, et de Lâvo. Bangkok, Bangkok Times Press. [in Thai and French; contains Lopburi inscriptions of 7th. c. AD]

Coedès, George. 1937-1966. Inscriptions du Cambodge (8 vols. École française d'Extrême-Orient  collections de textes et Documents sur l’Indochine). Hanoi, Imprimetie Imprimetie d'Extrême-Orient.

Coedès, Georges. 1939. La plus ancienne inscriptions en langue cham. In S.M. Katre and P.K. Gode (eds.) A volume of Eastern and Indian studies presented to Professor F.W. Thomas, C.I.E.: on his 72nd birth-day, 21st March 1939. Bombay: Karnatak publishing house.  New Indian Antiquary extra series 1:46-49.

COEDES, George. 1952. A propos de deux fragments d’inscription récemment découverts à P’ra Pathom (Thailand). in: Institut de France. Académie des Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. Séance du 21 mars 1952: Cinquantenaire de la foundation de l’Ecole Frecaise d’Extrême Orient. Paris, 27-31. [6th c. Dvâravatî Mon inscr.]

Coedes, Georges. 1968. The Indianized States of Southeast Asia. Translated by S.B. Cowing. Edited by W.F. Vella. Honolulu: East West Press. (translation of 1964 French edition, Paris, Editions E. de Boccard). 

Cohen, Patrick D. 1966. Presyllables and Duplication in Jeh. Mon-Khmer Studies 2:91-103.

Cohen, Patrick D. 1976a. Word Affixation in Jeh. Mon-Khmer Studies 5:25-42.

Cohen, Patrick D. 1976b. The noun phrase in Jeh. Mon-Khmer Studies 5:139-152.

Cole, F.T. 1879. “Lists of words and phrases with their Santali equivalents” Indian Antiquary 8:194-6

Cole, F.T. 1906. Santali Primer. Pokhuria: Santal Mission Press

Collins, Ira Vaughn. 1975. The Austro-Asiatic substratum in Acehnese. PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley.

Collins, James T. 1992. Bibliografi dialek Melayu di Semenanjung Melayu. Unpublished manuscript. Location: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Collins, James T. 1998. "Bahasa Melayu di Hulu Tembeling: menjejaki sejarah Semenanjung." Jurnal Dewan Bahasa, 42: 145-157.

Comrie, Bernard. 2007. Areal Typology of Mainalnd Southeast Asia: What We Learn from the WALS Maps. Manusya 13.18-47

Condominas, Georges. 1957. Nous avons mangé la forêt [….]. Paris: Mercure de France.

Condominas, Georges. 1977. We have eaten the forest: the story of a Montagnard village in the Central Highlands of Vietnam. (Translation of 1957 French version). New York, Hill and Wang.

Cook, W.A. 1965. A Descriptive Analysis of Mundari: a study of the structure of the Mundari language according to the methods of linguistic science. PhD-Dissertation, to be published at Georgetown University Press

Cooper, Doug. 2008. "Sound[s|ed] like ...? Approximate Phonetic Search in the Mon-Khmer Languages Project". 18th Annual Conference of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society (SEALS), Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, 21-22 May 2008

Cooper, Doug. 2009. "Data Sharing in the Mon-Khmer Languages Project" In K. S. Nagaraja (ed.) Proceedings of the 3rd International Conference on Austroasiatic Languages, Deccan College Post-Graduate & Research Institute, India

Cooper, James & Nancy Cooper. 1964. Halang dictionary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications.

Cooper, James & Nancy Cooper. 1966. Halang Phonemes. Mon-Khmer Studies 4:87-98. 

Cooper, James & Nancy Cooper. 1976. Halang Rhyming Dictionary: Halang-English. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Cooper, James. 1965. Halang verb phrase. Te Reo, pp28-34.

Cooper, James. 1971. Bai lo0kn]r Hala&ng Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons No.6 part 2. Saigon, Bo6 Giao-duc.

Cooper, James. 1973. An Ethnography of Halang Rhymes. Mon-Khmer Studies 4:33-41.

COORER, W.G. 1914. A note on Talaing Nissayas and vocabulary. JBRS 4.2.125-135.

COORER, W.G. 1915. A Mon (Talaing) thinbongyi. Rangoon, Irrawaddy Press. 43pp.

Costello, N. and Sulavan, K. 1996 Preliminary statement of Katu orthography in Lao script, Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 26:233-244.

Costello, Nancy A. and Khamluan Sulavan. 1993. Katu Folktales and Society, Katu-Lao-English. Vientiane, Ministry of Information and Culture.

Costello, Nancy A. 1966. Affixes in Katu. Mon-Khmer Studies 1:63-86.

Costello, Nancy A. 1971. Ngữ-vựng Katu: Katu vocabulary. Vietnam Montagnard Language Series 5. Saigon, Department of Education. (Summer Institute of Linguistics Dallas Microfiche).

Costello, Nancy A. 1991. Katu Dictionary (Katu-Vietnamese-English). Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Costello, Nancy. 1998. Affixes in Katu of the Lao P.D.R. Mon-Khmer Studies 28:31-42.

Court, Christopher. 1967. "Some areal features of Mĕntu Land Dayak." Oceanic Linguistics 6: 46-50.

Court, Christopher. 1970. “Nasal harmony and some Indonesian sound laws." Pacific linguistic studies in honour of Arthur Capell, eds. S.A. Wurm and D.C. Laycock. Pacific linguistic studies in honour of Arthur Capell, pp. 203-217. Canberra: Australian National University.

Cowan, H.K.J. 1948. “Aantekeningen betreffende de verhouding van het Atjehsch tot de Mon-Khmer talen.” Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- end Volkenkunde van Nederl. Indie, 104:429-514

Crawfurd, John. 1828. Journal of an Embassy from the Governor-General of India to the Courts of Siam and Cochin China. London: Henri Colburn. 

Critchfield, Jean. 1962. “Car Nicobarese Phonology.” Unpublished MS, Berkeley

Critchfield, Jean. 1963. “A Binary Comparison of the Car and Central Dialects of Nicobarese.” Unpublished MS, Berkeley

Critchfield, Jean. 1963. “Loan-words in Car Nicobarese.” Unpublished MS, Berkeley

Critchfield, Jean. 1964. “Car Nicobarese Morphology I: The Substantive.” Unpublished MS, Berkeley

Critchfield, Jean. 1964. “Portuguese Loan-words in Car Nicobarese.” Unpublished MS, Paper read to the Western branch of the American Oriental Society (Berkeley), March 1964

Critchfield-Braine, Jean C. 1970. Nicobarese Grammar (Car Dialect). Ph.D. Dissertation, University of California, Berkeley

Croft, William. 2005. “Word classes, parts of speech, and syntactic argumentation.” Linguistic Typology 9/3:431-41

Crooke, W. 1892. “Vocabulary of the Korwa language” JRAS 61/1:125-8

Crowley, James Dale, 2000, Tampuon phonology. Mon-Khmer Studies 30:1-21.

Crowley, James Dale, Vay Tieng, and Wain Churk. 2007. Tampuan Khmer English dictionary: with English Khmer Tampuan glossary. Cambodia: EMU International & National Language Institute of the Royal Academy of Cambodia 

Cubuat and Richard Watson. 1976. Pacoh language lessons. Huntington Beach California, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Culshaw, Wesley J. 1949. Tribal Heritage: A Study of the Santals. London: Lutterworth

Cunningham, Alexander. 1871. The ancient geography of India. London: Trübner & Co.

Cust, R.N. 1884. “Grammatical note and vocabulary of the language of the Korku, a Kolarian tribe in Central India” JRAS (new Series) 16:164-79 

Daengdeelerd, Nobjai (นพชัย แดงดีเลิศ). 1999. “Dvaravati inscriptions: a palaeographical study / จารึกทวารวดี : การศึกษาเชิงอักขรวิทยา.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56866&language=thai.

Dahl, Otto Christian. 1973. Proto-Austronesian. Lund, Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies. Monograph Series No. 15.

Dai Qingxia and Liu Yan. 1997. Analysis of the tones in the Guangka Subdialect of De’ang，Mon-Khmer Studies 27:91-108.

Dai Qingxia and Liu Yan. 1997. The tonogeneses of Asian Language from the view of Tibet-Burman and Mon-Khmer Languages, Collected Essays of Chinese Minority Languages, Yunnan Nationality Press. Kunming, Yunnan.

Daladier , Anne 2016. The counting unit system of Pnar, War, Khasi, Lyngam and its traces in Austroasiatic composite cardinal systems, North East Indian Linguistics 7, chap. 12, eds. Linda Konnerth, Stephen Morey, Priyankoo Sarmah & Amos Teo, Canberra, Australian National University: Asia-Pacific Linguistics Open Access 

Daladier, Anne. 2002. “Definiteness in Amwi: Grammaticalization and Syntax.” A. Zribi Hert & A. Daladier (eds.). Recherches Linguistiques de Vincennes, 31, PUV. 61-78

Daladier, Anne. 2011. The Group Pnaric-War-Lyngngam and Khasi as a Branch of Pnaric. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. 4.2:169-206.

Daladier, Anne. in press. “Khasi.” Encyclopédie des sciences du language, Dictionnaire des langues. Presse Universitäires de France

Daladier, Anne. in press. “Kinship and Spirit Terms renewed as Classifiers of ‘Animate’ Nouns and their Reduced Combining Forms in Austroasiatic.” Proceedings of the 28th Berkeley Linguistic Society Annual Conference. Berkeley

Dalgado, Sebastião Rodolfo. 1913. Influencia do vocabulário português em línguas asiáticas (abrangendo cêrca de cinquenta idiomas). Coimbra: Imprensa da Universidade.

Dalton, E.T. 1886. “The Kols of Chotanagpur.” Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal XXXV/2 (supplementary no.):158-93

Dalton, Edward Tuite. 1872. Descriptive ethnology of Bengal. Calcutta, Office of the Superintendent of government printing. (Khasi vocabulary on p. 235)

DALTON, Edward Tuite. 1875. Descriptive ethnology of Bengal. Calcutta, Government Printing. [Mon vocabulary, pp. 235-241]

DAMAIS, L[ouis]- C[harles]. 1955. Les écritures d’origine indienne en Indonésie et dans le Sud-Est Asiatique continental. Bulletin de la Société d’Etudes Indochinoises 30.365-382. [fig. 15]

Ðặng Nghiêm Vạn. 1983. Mảng / Ơđu vocabulary. Unpublished manuscript prepared in Hanoi for Michel Ferlus.

DANI, Ahmad Hasan. 1963. Indian palaeography. Oxford, Clarendon Press. [xix], 297pp., pll. [p. 247 Nakhorn pathom fragment, script shown on pl.22]

Dao Jie 刀洁. 2007. Bumang yu yanjiu 布芒语研究 [A study of Bumang]. Beijing: 民族出版社 [Nationalities Publishing House].

Das, A.R. 1977. A Study of the Nicobarese Language. Calcutta: Government of India (Anthropological Survey of India)

Das, R. 1871. “An introduction to the Mundari language” JASB 40:46-66

Dasbabu, Ashok Ku. 1991. Kharia [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Academy of Tribal Dialects and Culture, Tribal Language Study Series, VIII) (in Oriya)

Dasgupta, D. 1966. “Kharia Thar and the Hill Kharias of Manbhum.” Unpublished Manuscript

Dasgupta, Dipankar. 1978. Linguistic Studies in Juang, Kharia Thar, Lodha Mal-Pahariya, Ghatoali Pahariya. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey

Dash, Jagannatha. 1999. Human ecology of foragers: a study of the Kharia (Savara), Ujia (Savara), and Birhor in Similipal Hills. (No further data available)

Dash, Jagannatha. 1999. Human ecology of foragers: a study of the Kharia (Savara), Ujia (Savara), and Birhor in Similipal Hills. (No further data available)

Dash, R.N. (ed.). 1992. Art and culture of the Juang. Bhubaneswar: Orissa Lalit Kala Akademi

Dauplay, J. J. 1929. Les Terres Rouges du Plateau des Boiovens. Saigon: Bibliotheque Documentaire Extreme-Orientale-Chambre d'Agriculture de la Cochinchine.

Davias-Baudrit, Le Père J., M.E.P. 1966. Dictionnaire rhadé-français. Mission Catholique de Banmethuot.

Davidson, Jeremy H.C.S. (ed.). 1991. Austroasiatic Languages: Essays in Honour of H.L. Shorto. School of Oriental and African Studies. London, University of London

Davies, Henry Rudolph. 1909. Yün-nan: the link between India and the Yangtze. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press. [Mon vocabulary in pocket at back]

Davis J. & R. Smith. 1973. Southern Laos Tribes (map). Mon-Khmer Studies 4:xi.

Davis, Garry W. & Gregory K. Iverson (eds.). 1992. Explanation in Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Davis, John J. 1968. Nyaheun Phonemes. unpublished manuscript. Copy held at David Thomas Library (Bangkok) file 495.955(6).

Davis, John J. 1973. Notes on Nyaheun grammar, Mon-Khmer Studies, 4:69-75

De Armond, R. 1976. “Proto-Gutob-Remo-Gtaq stressed monosyllabic vowels and initial consonants” Austroasiatic Studies I:213-27

De Armond, R. 1976. “Proto-Gutob-Remo-Gtaq stressed monosyllabic vowels and initial consonants” Austroasiatic Studies I:213-27

de Rhodes, Alexandre. 1991 (translation into Vietnamese from 1651 publication). Từ Ðiển Annam-Lusitan-Latinh (Thường Gọi là Từ Ðiển Việt-Bồ-La) [An Annamese-Portuguese-Latin Dictionary]. Ho Chi Minh City: Nhà Xuất Bản Khoa Học Xã Hội. 

de Röepstorff, F. Adolph. 1884. Dictionary of the Nancowry Dialect of the Nicobarese language. Calcutta.

de Röepstroff, F.Ad. 1875. Vocabulary of Dialects Spoken in the Nicobar and Andaman Isles. Calcutta (2nd edition)

De Smet, Rev. 1891. Rudiments of a Mundari grammar. Calcutta: COP

De Vreese, K. 1968. “Munda pronouns in new Indo-Aryan.” J.C. Heesterman et al. (eds.). Pratidânam. The Hague: Mouton. 359-61

DE’ THAW SAH? 1977. [kuiw kuiw kuiw]. [tn·ay twuiy d?un· man] 15-18. [discusses the role of the particle kuiw [benefactive, noun-linking] in Mon] [in Mon]

Deb, P.C. 1962. “Marriage among the Dhalki Kharias.” Bulletin of the Tribal Research Institute, Chhindwara, 2/1

Deeney, John, S.J. 1978. Ho-English Dictionary. Cahibasa: Xavier Ho Publications

Deeney, John, S.J.. 1975. Ho Grammar and Vocabulary. Chaibasa: Xavier Ho Publications

Delancey, Scott. 2013. The origins of Sinitic. In Zhou Jing-Schmidt (ed.) Increased Empiricism: Recent Advances in Chinese Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company. pp. 73-99.

Delcros, Henri and Jean Subra. 1966. Petit dictionnaire du langage des Khmu' de la région de Xieng-Khouang. Vientiane, Mission Catholique (Mimeograph).

Dell, François and Mohamed Elmedlaoui. 1996. Consonant Release in Berber. Linguistics 34, 357-95.

Deloustal, Raymond. 1914. Des déterminatifs en annamite. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient 14.5:19-40.

Dempwolff, Otto. 1934-38. Vergleichende Lautlehre des austronesischen Wortschatzes I: des Urindonesischen auf austronesische Einzelsprachen (1937); 3; Austronesisches Wörterverzeichnis (1938).

Dentan, Robert K. 1968. The Semai: a non-violent people of Malaya. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. 

Dentan, Robert K. m.s. An outline of Semai grammar. n.d.

Department of the Army. 1968. Minority groups in Thailand. Ethnographic study series. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Defense. 

Dhar, Chelmelyne. 2012. A phonological and lexical study of Lamin and Shella varieties of Khasi a comparative study. PhD thesis, North Eastern Hill University, Shillong.

Diebold, A. Richard, Jr. 1960 Determining the centers of dispersal of language groups. International Journal of American Linguistics 26: 1-10

Diengdoh, A.K. 1965. Leemuel’s Anglo-Khasi pocket dictionary. Shillong: Harrison

Diengdoh, Ardabarmekiia. 2014.  Comparative study of Sohkha WAR and Wahiajer PNAR varieties of Khasi Language. PhD thesis, North Eastern Hill University, Shillong. 

Diffloth, Gérard & Norman Zide (eds). 1976. Austroasiatic Number Systems. Linguistics Special Publication 174.

Diffloth, Gérard.  1980.  To Taboo Everything At All Times. Proceedings of the Berkeley Linguistic Society, 6: 157-65.  

Diffloth, Gérard. & Norman Zide. 1992. “Austro-Asiatic languages.” In: William Bright (ed.): International Encyclopedia of Linguistics. New York: Oxford University Press. Vol. I:137-42

Diffloth, Gérard. 1968. Proto-Semai Phonology. Federation Museums Journal (new series), 13: 65-74.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1974. Austro-Asiatic Languages. In Encyclopaedia Britannica: Chicago/London/Toronto/Geneva Encyclopaedia Britannica Inc. Macropaedia 2:480-484. 15th edition.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1975. "Les langues Mon-Khmer de Malaisie: classification historique et innovations." Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 6.4:1-19.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1976. Jah-Hut, an Austroasiatic language of Malaysia. in N.D. Liem (ed.). Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies Vol.2. Canberra, Australian National University, Pacific Linguistics (vol. C-No.42.) pp. 73-118.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1976. Proto-Mon-Khmer Final Spirants. Discussion Paper No. 88, The Centre for Southeast Asian Studies, Kyoto: Kyoto University.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1977. Mon-Khmer Initial Palatals and “substratumized” Austro-Thai. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal, 6: 39-57.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1977. Proto-Waic and the Effects of Register on Vowel Gliding. Paper read at the Tenth International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Oct. 14-16, 1977, Georgetown, University of Washington.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1977. Towards a History of Mon-Khmer: Proto-Semai Vowels. Tônan Ajia Kenkyû (Southeast Asian Studies) 14.4:463-95. 

Diffloth, Gérard. 1979. Aslian languages and Southeast Asian prehistory. Federation Museums Journal. 24ns:3-16. 

Diffloth, Gérard. 1979. Expressive phonology and prosaic phonology in Mon-Khmer. In Studies in Taj and Mon-Khmer Phonetics and Phonology in honor of Eugénie J. A. Henderson, ed. Theraphan L. Thongkum et al, 49–59. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University Press. 

Diffloth, Gérard. 1979. The Wa Languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area. Vol. 5.2. Berkeley, University of California.

DIFFLOTH, Gérard. 1981. Reconstructing Dvâravatî Old Mon. in: [#213], 115-127. [bibliography missing]

DIFFLOTH, Gérard. 1982. Mon registers: Two, three, four, . . . ? Berkeley Linguistics Society 8.148-147.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1982. Registres, dévoisement, timbres vocaliques: leur histoire en Katouique. Mon-Khmer Studies 11:47-82.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1984. The Dvaravati-Old Mon Language and Nyah Kur (Monic Language Studies 1). Bangkok, Chulalongkorn University Printing House.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1989. Proto-Austroasiatic Creaky Voice. Mon-Khmer Studies 15:139-154.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1987-88. What Happened to Austric? Mon-Khmer Studies 16-17:1-9.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1991. Palaungic Vowels in Mon-Khmer Perspective. In Austroasiatic Languages, Essays in honour of H. L. Shorto, edited by Jeremy H.C.S. Davidson. 13-28. School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1991. Vietnamese as a Mon-Khmer language. In Ratliff and Schiller (eds.), Papers from the First Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. Tempe, Arizona : Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies. pp 125-139.

Diffloth, Gérard. 1992. Indigenous languages of Cambodia. 25th ICSTLL, Berkeley, CA, Oct. Unpublished manuscript. 

Diffloth, Gerard. 1994. The lexical evidence for Austric so far. Oceanic Linguistics 33(2):309-321. 

Diffloth, Gérard. 2005. The contribution of linguistic palaeontology to the homeland of Austro-asiatic. In: Sagart, Laurent, Roger Blench and Alicia Sanchez-Mazas (eds.). The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics. London & New York: Routledge/Curzon. 79-82.

Diffloth, Gérard. 2008. Proto-Aslian diphthongs and historical parallels in other Austroasiatic languages. Paper presented at the 18th Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistic Society, Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Bangi, Selangor. 22 May, 2008. 

Diffloth, Gérard. 2009. More on Dvaravati Old Mon. Paper presented at the Fourth International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics. Mahidol University, Salaya. (Austroasiatic classification reproduced in: George van Driem. 2012. The ethnolinguistic identity of the domesticators of Asian rice. Palevol 11.2-3:117-132.

Diffloth, Gérard. 2011. Considerations on the Homeland of Austroasiatic People. In K.S. Nagaraja (ed.) Austro-Asiatic Linguistics: In memory of R. Elangaiyan. (Proceedings of the 3rd International Conference on Austroasiatic Languages). Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages. pp.33-34

Diffloth, Gérard. 2012. The four registers of Pearic. Paper presented at the SEALS22 meeting, Argay, France. 12 page handout.

Dinh Dô, Dinh Môc, and Jacqueline Maier. 1974. Cua Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No.10. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Dinh Le Thu. 2007. Reduplication In The M’nong Language. In SEALS VIII Papers from the 8th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1998, edited by Mark Alves, Paul Sidwell and David Gil . Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp.57-65.

Dissawarotham, Pijitra. 1986. “The Phonology of Plang as Spoken in Banhuaynamkhum Chiengrai Province.” Mahidol University.

Doáng, Tinh Lâm. 1983. T[2 Fieên vie6út-k]ho. (Vietnamese-Köho Dictionary. Cited by Effimov 1990, but no other reference details given. I once briefly saw a copy which I suspect is the very same one that Efimov used).

Donegan, Patricia and David Stampe. 2004. ‘Rhythm and the synthetic drift of Munda.’ In R. Singh, Ed. The Yearbook of South Asian Languages and Linguistics. Berlin/New York, Mouton de Gruyter: 3-36.

Donegan, Patricia and David Stampe 1983. Rhythm and holistic organization of language structure. In: J. Richardson, M. Marks and A. Chukerman (eds) Papers from the Parasession on the Interplay of Phonology, Morphology and Syntax. Chicago: Chicago Linguistic Society. 337-353.

Donegan, Patricia and David Stampe. 2002. South-East Asian Features in the Munda Languages: Evidence for the Analytic-to-Synthetic Drift of Munda. Proceedings of the Twenty-Eighth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society: Special Session on Tibeto-Burman and Southeast Asian Linguistics. pp. 111-120.

Donegan, Patricia. 1993. Rhythm and vocalic drift in Munda and Mon-Khmer. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 16.1:1-43

d'Oréans, Henri. 1898. Fron Tonkin to India by the sources of the Irawadi. Translated by Hamley Bent. London, Methuen.

Dourisboure, Le Père P.-X. 1889. Dictionnaire bahnar-français. Hongkong, Imprimerie de la Société des Missions Etrangères 45.

Dournes, Jacques [Dam Bo]. 1950b. Les populations montagnardes du sud-Indo-Chinois (Pemsiens). France-Asie, 5:49-50, 931-1208.

Dournes, Jacques. 1950. Dictionnaire Srê (Köhö)-Français. Saigon, des Missions Etrangères de Paris.

Drage, Godrey. 1907. A few notes on Wa. Rangoon, superintendent, Government Press.

Drake, John. 1897. Koro Shiring do Dharompustako mandi. (no further data available)

Drake, John. 1903. A Grammar of the Kurku Language. Calcutta: Baptist Mission Press

Drouin, S., and K'nai. 1962. Dictionnaire français-montagnard (Ko#ho). 4 volumes. Dalat. (mimeographed: Wason film 2359, Cornell University. Wason Collection).

Duangsamran, Watanee (วัฒนี ด้วงสำราญ). 1994. “Lexical study of Mon spoken in Pathum Thani, Samut Sakhon and Ratchaburi / การศึกษาเรื่องศัพท์ภาษามอญในจังหวัดปทุมธานี สมุทรสาคร และราชบุรี.” Silpakorn University.

Dùaŋ Sɛ́ɛŋ. 1983. ‘Cɨ́aŋs saga’ [The story of Cɨ́aŋ]. Orientaliska studier 43/44, 28–39. [Annotated translation by Kristina Lindell]

Dufossé, Dr. 1934. Monographie des peuplades kouys du Cambodge. Extrême-Asie 83:553–568. 

Dumoutier, Gustave Emile. 1891. Notes sur la Rivière Noire et le Mont Ba-Vi (Tonkin). Bulletin de Géographie historique et descriptive 1891.4:150-196.

Dunn, Michael, Niclas Burenhult, Nicole Kruspe, Sylvia Tufvesson, and Neele Becker. 2011. Aslian linguistic prehistory: A case study in computational phylogenetics. Diachronica 28.3:291-323

Dunn, Michael, Nicole Kruspe, Niclas Burenhult. 2013. Time and Place in the Prehistory of the Aslian Languages. Human Biology 85(1-3):383-400. DOI: 10.3378/027.085.0318

Dương, Quảng-Hàm. (1941). Việt-nam văn-học sử-yếu [Outline history of Vietnamese literature]. Saigon: B? Qu?c gia Giáo d?c. 

Dupont, P. 1959. L'archéologie Mône de Dvâravatî. Publications de I'Ecole Française d'Extréme-Orient 41. Paris

Durie, Mark & Malcolm Ross (eds.). 1996. The Comparative Method Reviewed. New York & Oxford, Oxford University Press.

Durie, Mark. 1985. A grammar of Acehnese, on the basis of a dialect of north Aceh. Dordrecht: Foris Publications. 

Durie, Mark. 1990. Proto-Chamic and Acehnese mid vowels: towards Proto-Aceh-Chamic. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, Vol.53. London, University of London, pp 99-114.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1912. Further note on the word ‘talaing’. JBRS 2. 246-248.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1912. Note on the word ’Talaing’. JBRS 2.100-101.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1913. Talaing Nissayas. JBRS 3.103-146. [contains vocabulary, compiled on the basis of Mon-Pali bilinguals] 

Duroiselle, Charles. 1914. Talaing Nissayas: some further corrections. JBRS 4.135-136.

Duroiselle, Charles. 1921. A list of inscriptions found in Burma. Part 1: The list of inscriptions arranged in the order of their dates. Rangoon, Government Printing. [Appendix A, pp. 208-213, Mon inscrr.]

Duroiselle, Charles (ed.). 1919-1936. Epiqraphia Birmanica. Rangoon, Government Printing.

Duroiselle, Charles. Et al. 1914. Replies to Mr. Cooper’s note on Talaing Nissayas and vocabulary. JBRS 4. 233-236. [includes discussion by Halliday and Blagden]

Dutta, Hemanga. 2011. Derivational Morphology Compounding in Pnar. In Gwendolyn Hyslop, Stephen Morey, and Mark W. Post (eds.)  North East Indian Linguistics (Vol. 3). New Delhi, Cambridge University Press India. pp. 241-256.

Dutton, Tom & Darrell Tryon (eds.) 1994. Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World. Berlin & New York, Mouton de Gruyter.

Dwarikesh, D.P.S. & Norman Herbert Zide. 1962. “The Comparative Phonology of Proto-Nicobarese as derived from Kar Nicobarese and Central Nicobarese” Unpublished Mimeo

Dwivedi, D.S. 1962-4. “Korku Pronouns.” Madhyabharati, 11-13/11-13:89-92

Dyen, Isidore. 1951. Proto-Malayo-Polynesian *Z. Language 27.4:534-40.

Dyen, Isidore. 1953. Dempwolff's *R. Language, 29.3:359-366. 

Dyen, Isidore. 1953. Proto-Malayo-Polynesian laryngeals. Baltimore: Linguistic Society of. America. 

Dyen, Isidore. 1962. Individual research activities. Oceanic Linguistics 1:15–16.

Dyen, Isidore. 1963. The position of the Malayo-Polynesian Languages of Formosa. Asian Perspectives 7: 261-71.

Dyen, Isidore. 1965. A lexicostatistical classification of the Austronesian languages. International Journal of American Linguistics Memoir 19.

Dyen, Isidore. 1965. Formosan evidence for some new proto-Austronesian phonemes. Lingua 14: 285-305.

Dyen, Isidore. 1966. A lexicostatistical classification of the Austronesian languages. Rev. by George W. Grace. Oceanic Linguistics 5:13–31.

Dyen, Isidore. 1966. Comment [on Grace’s review of Dyen’s A lexicostatistical classification of the Austronesian languages]. Oceanic Linguistics 5:32–49.

Dyen, Isidore. 1975. A reconstructional confirmation: The Proto-Austronesian word for ‘two’. Oceanic Linguistics 14:1–11.

Dyen, Isidore. 1978. The position of the languages of eastern Indonesia. In, Wurm, S.A. and Lois Carrington, (eds.), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, fascicle I. Western Austronesian. (Pacific Linguistics C-61), 234-254. Canberra: Australian National University.

Dyen, Isidore. 2001. Review of Thurgood 1999, Anthropological Linguistics, 43.3:390-294.

Edmondson, Jerold A and Kenneth Gregerson. 1996. Bolyu tone in Vietic perspective, Mon-Khmer Studies 26:117-133

Edmondson, Jerold A. 1996. Voice qualities and inverse filtering in Chong. Mon-Khmer Studies 26: 107-116.

Edmondson, Jerold. 1995. English-Bolyu Glossary. Mon-Khmer Studies 24:133-159.

Edmondson, Jerold. 2010. The Khang language of Vietnam in comparison to Ksingmul (Xinh-mun). In Kenneth A. McElhanon & Ger Reesnik (eds) A Mosaic of languages and cultures: studies celebrating the career of Karl J. Franklin. SIL e-Books 19. SIL International: http://www.sil.org/silpubs

Efimov, A. Ju. 1979. Istoricheskoe Razvitie Austroaziatskix Rifm s Zadnejazychnymi i Laringal'nymi Finaljami. Problemy Jazykov Azii i Afriki (fonetika, morfologija, sintaksis, semantika). Moskva, Nauka, pp 131-44.

Efimov, A. Ju. 1990. Istoricheskaja Fonologija Juzhnobaxnaricheskix Jazykov. Moskva, Nauka.

Efimov, Aleksandr 1983. Problemy fonologicheskoj rekonstrukcii proto-katuicheskogo jazyka. Kandidat Dissertation, Institute of Far Eastern Studies Moscow.

Egerod, S. 1961. Studies in Thai dialectology. Acta Orientalia. 26. 43-91.

Egerod, Søren and Jørgen Rischel. 1987. A Mlabri-English vocabulary. Acta Orientalia 48.35-88.

Ehrenfels, U.R. von. 1953. “Khasi Kinship terms in four dialects.” Anthropos 48:396-412

Ekawit Chinowat. 1983. A comparative study of the morphological processes of Kui, Bruu and So. Chulalongkorn University MA thesis. 

Elkins, Richard E. 1974. A Proto-Manobo word-list. Oceanic Linguistics. 13:601–641.

Ellul, Jacques. 1968. Enregistrement magnétique de vocabulaire saoch, région de Veal Renh, Cambodge.

Elwin, Verrier. 1942. The Agaria. H. Milford, Oxford University Press.

Elwin, Verrier. 1948. “Notes on the Juang.” Man in India XXVIII

Elwin, Verrier. 1955. The Religion of an Indian Tribe. London: Oxford University Press

Embree, John F., and William L. Thomas Jr. 1950. Ethnic Groups of Northern Southeast Asia, (mimeographed). New Haven, Yale University Southeast Asia Studies.

Emeneau, M. B. 1947. Homonyms and puns in Annamese. Language, 23 (3), 239-244. 

Emeneau, Murray B. 1951. Studies in Vietnamese (Annamese) Grammar. University of California Publications in Linguistics. Vol.8. Berkeley & Los Angeles, University of California Press.

Emeneau, Murray B. 1980. Language and Linguistic Area. Essays by Murray B. Emeneau. A. Dil (ed.) Stanford, Stanford University Press.

Emeneau, Murray Barnson.1954. Linguistic prehistory of India. In Proceedings of the American Philosophical Society 98.4:282-292.

Endicott, Kirk. 1979. Batek Negrito Religion. Oxford: Clarendon Press.

Enfield, N. J. and Bernard Comrie. 2015. Mainland Southeast Asian language. In N J. Enfield and Bernard Comrie (eds.) The languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: The state of the art. Boston/Berlin: De Gruyter Mouton (Pacific Linguistics 649). pp. 1-28.

Enfield, Nicholas and Gerard Diffloth 2009. Phonology and sketch grammar of Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Cahiers de Linguislique - Asie Orientale 38.1: 3-69.

Enfield, Nicholas and Gerard Diffloth. 2007. Introducing Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Typescript, MPI for Psycholinguistics, May 2007. 

Enfield, Nicholas. 2003. Linguistic epidemiology: semantics and grammar of language contact in mainland Southeast Asia. London: RoutledgeCurzon. 

Enfield, Nicholas. 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology, Vol. 34, 181-206. 

Enfield, Nicholas. 2007. A grammar of Lao. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.

Enfield, Nicholas. 2011. Linguistic Diversity in mainland Southeast Asia. In N. J. Enfield (ed.) Dynamics of Human Diversity: the case of mainland Southeast Asia. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. 63-80.

Enfield, Nicholas. 2019. Mainland Southeast Asian Languages: A Concise Typological Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Engelkemier, Jennifer. 2010. “Aspects of Bru Kok Sa-at Grammar Based on Narrative Texts.” Payap University.

Engstrand, Lennart, Marie Widén & Björn Widén. 2005. ‘Växter till vardags’ [Everyday plants]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 175–206.

Engstrand, Lennart, Marie Widén, Björn Widén, Kàm Ràw (Damrong Tayanin) & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 2009. ‘A checklist of Kammu plant names’. Mon-Khmer studies 38, 223–48.

Eppele, John William, Carey Statezni, and Nathan Statezni. 2008. Monic Bibliography with selected annotations. Chiang Mai, Linguistic Institute Payap University.

Evans, Nicholas & Toshiki Osada. 2005. “Mundari and argumentation in word-class analysis.” Linguistic Typology 9/3:442-57

Evans, Nicholas & Toshiki Osada. 2005. “Mundari: The myth of a language without word classes.” Linguistic Typology 9/3:351-90

Evens, Ivor. 1915. Semang vocabulary obtained in Perak and Pahang. Journal of the Federated Malay States Museum. 6:115-25.

Évrard, Olivier. 2012. ‘Following Kàm Ràw’s trail’. In Tayanin & Lindell 2012, 1–28.

Fagan, Joel L. 1988. Javanese intervocalic stop phonemes. Studies in Austronesian Linguistics 76:173–202.

Ferlus, Michel. 1969-70. Lexique Cheng-Laveh-Sapuan. Unpublished ms.

Ferlus, Michel. 1971. Simplification des groupes consonantiques dans deux dialectes austroasiens du sud-Laos. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, 66: 389-403.

Ferlus, Michel. 1972. Note sur les dialectes austroasiens du sud-Laos. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien, 3.2: 35-41.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974. Le groupe viet-muong (Recherches dans le cadre de I’Atlas Ethnolinguistique). Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1:69-77.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974. Les langues du groupe austroasiatiques-nord. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1:39-68.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974a. Delimitation des groupes linguistiques austroasiatiques dans le centre indochinois. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1:15-23.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974b. Problèmes de mutations consonantiques en Thavung. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 69: 311-323.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974c. Lexique souei-français. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1: 141-159.

Ferlus, Michel. 1974d. La langue Ong, mutations consonantiques et transphonologisations. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1: 113-121.

Ferlus, Michel. 1975. Vietnamien et Proto-Viet-Mương. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien, 6.4: 21-56.

Ferlus, Michel. 1977. L'infixe instrumental rn en khamou et sa trace en vietnamien. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale 2:51-5.

Ferlus, Michel. 1979. Lexique thavung-français. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale 5:71-94.

Ferlus, Michel. 1980. Formation des registres et mutations consonantiques dans les langues Mon-Khmer Mon-Khmer Studies 8:1-76.

Ferlus, Michel. 1981. A propos d'un allongement vocalique devant la finale r en khmer ancien. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 12(1-2): 101-109.

Ferlus, Michel. 1982. Spirantisation des obstruantes médiales et formation du systèm consonantique du vietnamien. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale 11.1:83-106.

Ferlus, Michel. 1983. Essai de phonétique historique de môn. Mon-Khmer Studies 12:1-90.

Ferlus, Michel. 1989-90. Sur l'origine géographique des langues Viet-muong. Mon-Khmer Studies 18-19:52-59.

Ferlus, Michel. 1991. Vocalisme du Proto-Viet-Muong. Paper circulated at the Twenty-fourth ICS-TL&L. Chiang Mai University, Oct. 10-11, 1991.

Ferlus, Michel. 1992. Essai de phonétique historique du khmer (Du milieu du premier millénaire de notre ère à l'époque actuelle), Mon-Khmer Studies 21:57-89.

Ferlus, Michel. 1992. Sur l'origine géographique des langues Viet-Muong. Mon-Khmer Studies 18-19: 52-59.

Ferlus, Michel. 1992a. Histoire abregée de l'évoltion des consonnes initials du vietnamien. Mon-Khmer Studies 20:111-27.

Ferlus, Michel. 1996. Du taro au riz en Asie du Sud-Est, petite histoire d’un glissement sémantique. Mon-Khmer Studies, 25:39-49. 

Ferlus, Michel. 1996. Langues et peuples viet-muong. Mon-Khmer Studies, 26:7-28.

Ferlus, Michel. 1997. Problèmes de la formation du systèm vocalique du vietnamien. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale, 26.1.

Ferlus, Michel. 1997. Le maleng brô et le vietnamien", Mon-Khmer Studies 27 (Hommages à Paul K. Benedict): 55-66. 

Ferlus, Michel. 1998. Les systèmes de tons dans les langues viet-muong. Diachronica 15:1.1-27.

Ferlus, Michel. 1998. Nhaheun-French-English Lexicon, München, Lincom Europa.

Ferlus, Michel. 1999. Les disharmonies tonales en Viet-Muong et leurs implications historiques. Cahiers de linguistique – Asie Orientale 28(1): 83-100. 

Ferlus, Michel. 2004. The origin of tones in Viet-Muong. In Papers from the Eleventh Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2001. Edited by Somsonge Burusphat. Arizona State University: 297-313.

Ferlus, Michel. 2005. L'intérêt linguistique des transcriptions chinoises concernant le Cambodge ancien (Fou-nan et Tchen-la). Dix-neuvièmes Journées de Linguistique de l’Asie Orientale, 30 juin - 1er juillet, 2005. Paris: CRLAO (EHESS-CNRS). 

Ferlus, Michel. 2007. Lexique de racines Proto Viet-Muong (Proto Vietic Lexicon). Unpublished ms. http://sealang. net/monkhmer/database. 

Ferlus, Michel. 2009. A layer of Dongsonian vocabulary in Vietnamese. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1:95-108.

Ferlus, Michel. 2009. Le mot "sang" en austroasiaque. Mon-Khmer Studies, 38:25-39. 

Ferlus, Michel. 2009. What were the four Divisions of Middle Chinese ? Diachronica 26.2:184-213.

Ferlus, Michel. 2010. The Austroasiatic Vocabulary for Rice: its origin and expansion. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 3.2:60-74

Ferlus, Michel. 2011. ‘Toward Proto-Pearic: Problems and Historical Implications.’ In Sophana Srichampa, Paul Sidwell and Kenneth Gregerson (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies: papers from ICAAL4. Mon-Khmer Studies Journal Special Issue No. 3, part 1. Dallas, SIL International; Salaya, Mahidol University; Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp.38-51.

Ferlus, Michel. 2012.  Linguistic evidence of the trans-peninsular trade route from North Vietnam to the Gulf of Thailand (3rd-8th centuries). Mon-Khmer Studies 41:10-19.

Ferlus, Michel. 2xx7. Lexique de racines Proto Viet-Muong (Proto Vietic Lexicon). Unpublished manuscript, May 2007.

Ferlus, Michel. ms. nd. Lexique comparatif: Ta-Oy, Ong, Katang, Krieng.

Fernandez, Frank. & R.D. King. 1965. “A Grammar of Hill Remo” Unpublished Mimeo

Fernandez, Frank. 1963. A Phonology of Remo. Unpublished, University of North Carolina

Fernandez, Frank. 1967. A Grammatical Sketch of Remo: A Munda Language. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation. Chapel Hill

Fernandez, Frank. 1983. “The morphology of the Remo (Bonda) verb. International Journal of Dravidian Linguistics 12/1:15-45

Ferrell, Raleigh. 1969. Taiwan Aboriginal Groups: Problems in Cultural and Linguistic Classification. Taipei: Institute of Ethnology, Academia Sinica. Monograph No. 17. 

Field, J., Lahr, M. M. 2006: Assessment of the Southern Dispersal: GIS-Based Analyses of Potential Routes at Oxygen Isotopic Stage 4. Journal of World Prehistory 19.1:1-45.

Filbeck, David. 1978. T'in: a historical study. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Filbeck, David. 2009. Mal (Thin) - Thai - English Lexicon. Unpublished manuscript.

Filippi, Jean-Michel. 2000. Lexique et analyse phonétique du Saoch. Manuscript.

Filippi, Jean-Michel. 2008. Recherches préliminaires sur les langues des minorités du Cambodge. Publié par l'UNESCO et l'IDSSC, Phnom Penh, Editions Funan.

Finck, Franz Nikolaus. 1909. Die Sprachstämme des Erdkreises. Leipzig: B. G. Teubner.

Fiskesjö, Magnus. 2005a. ‘Kristina Lindell, 1928–2005’. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 16–22.

Fiskesjö, Magnus. 2005b. ‘Kristina Lindell (1928–2005) in memoriam’. Asian folklore studies 64:1, 139–45.

Fiskesjö, Magnus. 2012. ‘The extraordinary collaborative research on Khmu culture of Damrong Tayanin and Kristina Lindell’. In Tayanin & Lindell 2012, 197–209.

Fleming, Hal. 2000. LaVaughn Hayes and Robert Blust Discuss Austric. Mother Tongue V:29-32. 

Fleming, Harold C. 1996. “Looking to the West and North: Nihali and Kusunda Find Links.” Mother Tongue 2:67-74

Floor, H. & G. Druart. 1929. Language Hand-Book Kharia. Calcutta: Tea Districts Labour Association

Floor, H., V. Gheysens & G. Druart. 1934. Dictionary of the Kharia Language. Calcutta

Forbes, C. J. F. S. 1881. Comparative grammar of the languages of Further India: a fragment. And other essays..., London, W. H. Allen.

Forchhammer, Emil. 1882. Indo-Chinese languages. Indian Antiquary 11.177-189.

Forchheimer, Paul. 1953. The Category of Person in Language. Berlin (Khasi, p. 61)

Forchhhammer, Emil. 1884. Notes on the languages and dialects of Burma. Ragoon, Government of Burma. [Mon pp. 3-5]

Forster, Peter, and Colin Renfrew. 2011. “Mother Tongue and Y Chromosomes.” Science 333 (6048): 1390–91. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.1205331.

Fossey, Charles. 1927. Notices sur les caractères étrangers anciens et modernes. Paris, Imprimerie Nationale. [Georges Maspero on Mon, pp. 247-253; in second edition replaced by Coedès, pp. 318-323. Second ed. Appeared in 1948]

Fournier, A. 1974. “Les Khasi, une population mon-khmer de l’Inde.” Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5.1:79-96

Fox, Anthony. 1995. A Handbook of Phonological Reconstruction. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Friberg Timothy, and Kvoeu Hor. 1977. Register in Western Cham Phonology. Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics. 4. Chamic Studies. Pacific Linguistics Series A, No.48. Canberra, Australian National University, pp17-38.

Frieman, Catherine J., Phillip J. Piper, Nguyen Khanh Trung Kien, Tran Thi Kim Quy & Marc Oxenham. 2017. Rach Nui: ground stone technology in coastal Neolithic settlements of southern Vietnam. Antiquity 91.358: 933–946

Fuller, D., Lin Qin & Emma Harvey 2008. Evidence for the late onset of agriculture in the Lower Yangtze region and challenges for an archaeobotany of rice. In: Alicia Sanchez-Mazas, Blench, R.M., Ross, M.D., I. Peiros & Marie Lin eds. Human migrations in continental East Asia and Taiwan. Matching archaeology, linguistics and genetics. 40-83. London: Routledge. 

Fuller, Dorian Q, Qin L, Zheng Y, Zhao Z, Chen X, Hosoya LA, Sun G-P. 2009. The domestication process and domestication rate in rice: spikelet bases from the Lower Yangtze. Science  323:1607–1610.

Fuller, Dorian Q, Qin L. 2009. Water management and labour in the origins and dispersal of Asian rice. World Archaeol . 41:88–111.

Fuller, Dorian Q. 2006. “Agricultural Origins and Frontiers in South Asia: A Working Synthesis.” Journal of World Prehistory 20 (1): 1–86. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10963-006-9006-8.

Fuller, Dorian Q. and Marco Madella. 2009. Banana Cultivation in South Asia and East Asia: A review of the evidence from archaeology and linguistics. Ethnobotany Research and Applications 7:333-351

Fuller, Dorian Q., Cristina Castillo, Eleanor Kingwell-Banham, Ling Qin, and Alison Weisskopf. 2018. “Charred Pummelo Peel, Historical Linguistics and Other Tree Crops: Approaches to Framing the Historical Context of Early Citrus Cultivation in East, South and Southeast Asia.” In AGRUMED: Archaeology and History of Citrus Fruit in the Mediterranean : Acclimatization, Diversifications, Uses, edited by Girolamo Fiorentino and Véronique Zech-Matterne. Collection Du Centre Jean Bérard. Naples: Publications du Centre Jean Bérard. http://books.openedition.org/pcjb/2173.

Fuller, Dorian Q. and Cristina Cobo Castillo. 2021. The origins and spread of cereal agriculture in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Paul Sidwell and Mathias Jenny (eds.) The Languages and Linguistics of Mainland Southeast Asia: a comprehensive guide. Berlin/Boston; De Gruyter Mouton. pp. 45-59.

Fuller, Eugene, Ja Wi and Ja Ngai. 1974. Chru Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No.16. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Gabelentz, H.C. von der. 1858. “Grammatik und Wörterbuch der Khassia-Sprache.” Leipzig: Verh.d.kgl. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften zu Leipzig, Philol.-historische Klasse, 10:1-66

Gabelentz, Hans Conon, von der. 1858. Grammatik und Wörterbuch der Kassia-Sprache. (Ber.Sächs.Ges. Akademie der Wissenschaft, Philosophisch-historische Klasse 10).

Gage, William W. 1985. Vietnamese in Mon-Khmer perspective. In Suriya Ratanakul and David Thomas (eds.) Papers in Southeast Asian Languages and Linguistics in Honour of André-Georges Haudricourt. Bangkok, Mahidol University. pp. 493-524. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.

Gaikwad, Sonali, T.s. Vasulu, and V.k. Kashyap. 2006. “Microsatellite Diversity Reveals the Interplay of Language and Geography in Shaping Genetic Differentiation of Diverse Proto-Australoid Populations of West-Central India.” American Journal of Physical Anthropology 129 (2): 260–67. https://doi.org/10.1002/ajpa.20283.

Gainey, Jerry 1985. A comparative study of Kui, Bruu and So phonology from a genetic point of view. MA thesis Chulalongkorn University, Thailand. 

Gainey, Jerry and Klang Chaonam. 1981. So-English dictionary. Unpublished ms.

Gainey, Jerry. 1985. “A Comparative Study of Kui, Bruu and So Phonology from a Genetic Point of View.” Thesis, Chulalongkorn University. http://cuir.car.chula.ac.th/handle/123456789/38777.

Gait, E.A. 1892. Census of India, Vol I (contains notes on Khasi, pp. 187f.)

Gait, Edward A. 1928. “Ancient Bihar and Orissa.” Journal of the Royal Society of Arts 76 (3932): 510–29.

Gamkrelidze, Tamaz, and Vjacheslav Ivanov. 1984. Indoevropejskij jazyk i indoevropejcy. Tom 1 & 2. Tbilisi: Tbilisi State University.

Gandour, Jackson, Eva Gårding & Kristina Lindell. 1978. ‘Tones in Northern Kammu: a perceptual investigation’. Acta Orientalia 39, 181–89.

Gao Yongqi [高永奇]. 2003. A study of Mang [莽语硏究]. Beijing: Ethnic Publishing House [民族出版社].

Gao Yongqi [高永奇]. 2001. A sketch of Mang [莽语概况]. Minzu Yuwen 2001:4.

Gao Yongqi [高永奇]. 2004. A study of Buxing [Buxing yu yanjiu 布兴语研究]. Beijing: Minzu University Press [民族出版社].

Gårding, Eva & Kristina Lindell. 1977. ‘Tones in Northern Kammu: a phonetic investigation’. Acta Orientalia 38, 321–32.

Garnier, Francis. 1873. Voyage d'exploration en Indo-Chine effectué pendant les années 1866, 1867, et 1868 par une Commission Française présidée par M. le Capitaine de Frégate Doudart de Lagrée. Paris, Librarie Hachette. 

Garnier, Francis. 1873. Voyage d'exploration en Indo-Chine effectué pendant les années 1866, 1867, et 1868 par une commission française, présidée par Doudart de Lagreé, et publié...sous la direction de...Francis Garnier. 2 volumes. Paris, Hachette.

Gazi, Nurun Nahar, Rakesh Tamang, Vipin Kumar Singh, Ahmed Ferdous, Ajai Kumar Pathak, Mugdha Singh, Sharath Anugula, et al. 2013. “Genetic Structure of Tibeto-Burman Populations of Bangladesh: Evaluating the Gene Flow along the Sides of Bay-of-Bengal.” PLOS ONE 8 (10): e75064. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0075064.

Gedney, William J. 1989. A comparative sketch of White, Black, and Red Tai. Selected Papers on Comparative Tai Studies. In R.J. Bickner, J. Hartmann, T.J. Hudak and P. Peyasantiwong (eds.), Selected Papers on Comparative Tai Studies. Ann Arbor: Center for South and Southeast Asian studies, the University of Michigan. 415-462. 

Gehrmann, Ryan. 2015. Vowel Height and Register Assignment in Katuic. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 8:56-70.

Gehrmann, Ryan. 2016. The West Katuic Languages: comparative phonology and diagnostic tools. MA thesis, Payap University, Thailand.

Gehrmann, Ryan. 2012. Pseudoregister in Pacoh: Preliminary Acoustic Analysis and Implications for a General Model of Pseudoregister Formation in Austroasiatic. Mark Alves & Paul Sidwell (eds.) Papers from the 30th Conference of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society (2021). Manoa, University of Hawaii Press.  http://hdl.handle.net/10524/52498 

Gehrmann, Ryan. 2022. Desegmentalization: Towards a Common Framework for the Modeling of Tonogenesis and Registrogenesis in Mainland Southeast Asia with Case Studies from Austroasiatic. PhD thesis, The University of Edinburgh.

Gehrmann, Ryan. 2023. The Historical Phonology of Mang. Paper presented at the 11th meeting of the International Confernece on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Chiang Mai 26-27 October 2023.

Georg, Stefan, Peter A. Michalove, Alexis Manaster Ramer, and Paul J. Sidwell. 1999. “Telling general linguists about Altaic.” Journal of Linguistics 35:65–98. 

Geraghty, Paul A., 1983. The History of the Fijian Languages. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publication No.19. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press.

Geraghty, Paul A., 1986. The sound-system of Proto-Central-Pacific. in Geraghty, Paul A., Lois Carrington, and S.A. Wurm (eds), Focal II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics. Pacific Linguistics (C-94), 289-312. Canberra: Australian National University.

Geraghty, Paul A., 1989. The Reconstruction of Proto-Southern Oceanic. in Harlow, Ray, and Robin Hooper (eds), VICAL 1 - Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, 141-156. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Gernet, Jacques. 1989 (reprint). A History of Chinese Civilization, Second Edition. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. 

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1980. 'Santali kinship terminology: A sociolinguistic perspective', Calcutta Papers in Linguistics, I(1): 7-23.

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1980. 'Some notable findings in Santali as compared with that of PO. Bodding (1929)', Paper presented at the All India Conference of Dravidian Linguists, Osmania University, Hyderabad.

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1988. BIBLIOTHECA AUSTROASIATICA, Calcutta: Firma KLM Pvt. Ltd.

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1992. “Tagmemic analysis of some aspects of the Santali transitive verb.” In: J.C. Sharma (ed.): From sound to discourse. A tagmemic approach to Indian languages. Manasagangotri, Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages 

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1992. 'Tagmemic analysis of some aspects of the Santali transitive verb', in J.C. Sharma (ed.) From Sound to Discourse: A Tagmemic Approach to Indian languages,

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 1994. Santali - A Look into Santal Morphology. New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House.

Ghosh, Arun Kumar. 2003. An Ethnolinguistic Profile of Eastern India - A Case of South Orissa, Burdwan: University of Burdwan.

Ghosh, Arun. 1988. Bibliotheca Austroasiatica. Calcutta: Firma K.L.M.

Giaphong, Suchada. 2004. “Plang Grammar as Spoken in Huay Namkhun Village, Chiang Rai Province =: ไวยากรณ์ภาษาปลัง บ้านห้วยน้ำขุ่น จังหวัดเชียงราย.” Mahidol University.

Girard, Beryl. 1965. Korku-Hindi-English Dictionary. Central Indian Baptist Mission, ramkheRa, deRtalai, Nimar District, M.P. 

Glover, Warren. 1971. “Register in Tibeto-Burman languages of Nepal: a comparison with Mon-Khmer.” Pacific Linguistics, Series A, No. 29:1-22

Goldsmith, John. 1976. Autosegmental phonology. Cambridge, Mass.: Ph.D. dissertation, MIT.

Goral, Donald R. 1978. Numerical classifier systems: a southeast Asian cross-linguistic analysis. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 4.11:1-73.

Gordon Jr., Raymond G., ed. 2005. Ethnologue: Languages of the World. 15th Edition. Dallas: SIL International.

Gordon, Darren C. 2014. A selective Palaungic linguistic bibliography. Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 42.xiv–xxxiii .

Gordon, Matthew, and Peter Ladefoged. 2001. Phonation types: a cross-linguistic overview. Journal of Phonetics 29:383–406.

Gorgoniev, Yu. A. 1966. The Khmer language. Moscow, Nauka.

Gorgoniev, Yu. A. 1984. Kxmersko-Russkij Slovar'. Moskva, Russkij Jazyk.

Gorgoniev, Yu., Yu. Ya Plam, Yu. V. Rozhdestvenskii, G. P. Serdyuchenko, V. M. Solntsev. 1960. Obshchie cherty v stroe kitaisko-tibetskikh i tipoíogicheski blizkikh k nim yazykov Yugo-Vostochnoi Azii. Doklady sovetskikh delegátov na XXV mezhdunarodnom kongresse vostokovedov v Moskve.

Gorgoniev, Yu. 1965. Yavlenie parallelizma v stanovlenii grammaticheskikh kategorii v yazykakh izoliruyushchego tipa. In : Lingvisticheskaya tipologiya i vostochnye yazyki. Moscow, Nauka. pp.132-143.

Goswami, S.N. 1964. “A Note on the Khasi Article.” Bulletin of the Calcutta Philosophical Society, University of Calcutta. 1-8

Grace, George W. 1959. The position of the Polynesian languages within the Austronesian (Malayo-Polynesian) Language Family. IJAL Memoir 16.

Grace, George W. 1968. Classification of the languages of the Pacific. In, Vayda, A.P., ed. Peoples and Cultures of the Pacific, 63-79. New York: Natural History Press.

Grace, George W., 1955. Subgrouping of Malayo-Polynesian: a report of the tentative findings. American Anthropologist (57), 337-9.

Grace, George W., 1969. A Proto-Oceanic finderlist. University of Hawaii Working Papers in Linguistics (1,2), 39-84.

Grace, George W., 1971. Notes on the phonological history of the Austronesian languages of the Sarmi Coast. Oceanic Linguistics (10), 11- 37.

Grace, George W., 1976a. Review of Pawley (1972). Journal of the Polynesian Society, 103- 112.

Grace, George W., 1981. Indirect inheritance and the aberrant Melanesian languages, in Hollyman, Jim and Andrew Pawley (eds), Studies in Pacific Languages & Cultures in Honour of Bruce Biggs, 255- 268. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Grace, George W., 1985. Oceanic subgrouping: retrospect and prospect. In Pawley, Andrew and Lois Carrington (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the 15th Pacific Science Congress. Pacific Linguistics (C-88), 1-18. Canberra: Australian National University.

Grace, George W., forthcoming. Regularity of change in what? In Durie, Mark and Malcolm Ross (eds) The comparative method reviewed. London: Oxford University Press.

Gradin, Dwight, and Patrick Gradin. 1979. Jeh Dictionary. Huntington Beach CA, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Gradin, Dwight. 1966. Consonantal tone in Jeh phonemics. Mon-Khmer Studies 2:41-53.

Gradin, Dwight. 1970. Preliminary report on word affixation in Jeh. Ms. copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Gradin, Dwight. 1976. Word Affixation in Jeh. Mon-Khmer Studies 5:25-42.

Grant, Anthony. 2005. Non-referenced Lexicostatistics and Chamic. In Anthony Grant and Paul Sidwell (eds.) Chamic and beyond: Studies in mainland Austronesian languages. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. pp. 105-146.

Grawengij, Saiyud (สายหยุด กระเวณกิจ). 1981. “Pre-Angkorian scripts / อักษรสมัยก่อนพระนคร.” Silpakorn University.

Gray, Russell D, Alexei J Drummond, Simon J Greenhill. 2009. Language phylogenies reveal expansion pulses and pauses in Pacific settlement. Science 323:479-483

Gray, Russell D. & Quentin D. Atkinson. 2003. Language-tree divergence times support the Anatolian theory of Indo-European origin. Nature 426.27:435-439. doi:10.1038/nature02029 

Greenberg, Joseph H. 1965. Synchronic and diachronic universals in phonology. Language, 42.508-17.

Greenhill, Simon and Russell Gray. 2009. Austronesian language phylogenies: Myths and misconceptions about Bayesian computational methods. In Austronesian historical linguistics and culture history: a festschrift for Robert Blust. A. Adelaar & A. Pawley (Eds). Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. pp.375-397.

Greenhill SJ, Heggarty P, & Gray RD. 2020 Bayesian Phylolinguistics. In Janda RD, Joseph BD, & Vance BS (Eds) The Handbook of Historical Linguistics, Volume II, pp. 226--253. Wiley-Blackwell: New Jersey. 

Gregerson, Kenneth and David Thomas. 1976. Vietnamese Ho#i and Ngã Tones and Mon-Khmer -h Finals. Mon-Khmer Studies 5:76-84.

Gregerson, Kenneth and Kenneth D. Smith. 1973. The Development of To'drah Register. Mon-Khmer Studies 4:143-84.

Gregerson, Kenneth J. (1969). A study of Middle Vietnamese phonology. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Indochinoises, 44, 135-193. 

Gregerson, Kenneth J. 1976. “Tongue-Root and Register in Mon-Khmer.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). pp.323-369.

Gregerson, Kenneth J., Kenneth D. Smith, and David D. Thomas. 1976. The place of Bahnar within Bahnaric. In Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson and Stanley Starosta (eds.), Austroasiatic studies, part I. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publication, 13. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press. pp.371-406.

Gregerson, Kenneth, and Timothy Friberg. 1974. Vietnam Word Lists (Revised): Tampuan. (Copy of manuscript at Summer Institute of Linguistics Bangkok, folder 495.9 set 2).

Gregerson, Kenneth. & Kenneth D. Smith. 1969. Modra and Didra Linguistic Survey Report. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok (Monam folder 495.966).

Gregerson, Kenneth. & Marilyn Gregerson. 1977. Rengao Vocabulary. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 1969. A study of Middle-Vietnamese phonology. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Indochinoises, 44.2:121-93.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 1971. Predicate and Argument in Rengao Grammar. PhD Dissertation. Seattle, University of Washington.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 1984. Pharynx Symbolism and Rengao Phonology. Lingua 62.3: 209-238.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 1987. Pharynx Iconism as Figure and Ground. In Fleming (ed.) (1986), pp 29-49.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 1991. On Austronesian Lexicon in Vietnamese. In Jeremy Davidson (ed.) Austroasiatic Languages: Essays in honor of H. L. Shorto. London, SOAS. pp 81-94.

Gregerson, Kenneth. 2014.  Fifty Years of Mon-Khmer Studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 43.2:i-iii.

Gregerson, Marylin Joyce. 1991. The Rengao of Vietnam: An Ethnography of Texts. Doctoral Thesis. Arlington, University of Texas.

Grierson, George A. 1906. Muṇḍā and Dravidian Languages. Edited by G.A. Grierson. Vol. IV. Linguistic Survey of India. Calcutta: Office of the Superintendent of Goverment Printing.

Grierson, George A. 1919. Linguistic survey of India. vol. VIII, Part 1. Calcutta. 

Grierson, George Abraham. 1904. Linguistic Survey of India: Volume 2, Mon-Khmer and Siamese-Chinesefamilies (including Khassi and Tai). Calcutta, Government Printing .

Griffiths, Arlo and D. Christian Lammerts. 2015. Epigraphy: Southeast Asia. In  Jonathan A. Silk, Oskar von Hinüber, Vincent Eltschinger (eds.) Encyclopedia of Buddhism. Leiden: Brill. pp.988-1009.

Grimes, Barbara F. ed. 2000. Ethnologue: Languages of the World. Fourteenth Edition. Dallas: SIL International. 

Grimes, Charles, 1991. Central-Malayo-Polynesian: a critical evaluation. Paer presented at 6ICAL, the Sixth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, Honolulu, Hawaii.

Grimes, Joseph E. 1995. Language Survey Reference Guide. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Grimes, Josph E. & Barbara R. Grimes. 1993. Ethnologue Language family index. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

GRISWOLD, A[lexander] B. & Prasert Na NAGARA. 1971. An inscription in Old Mon from Wieng Manó in Chiang Mai province: Epigraphic and historical studies No. 6. The Journal of the Siam Society 59. 153-156. [text, transl. pl. of Mon inscr. [stone slab] dated 10th c. AD [Luce] or 11th c. AD [Shorto]

Gubler, J. s d. Liste de mots pears recueillis dans les Phnom Krevanh. Manuscript.

Guesdon, Joseph. 1930. Dictionnaire cambodgien-français. Paris, Plon. 

Guesdon, Père Joseph. 1930. Dictionnaire cambodgien-français, 2 vols. Paris: Plon.

Guilleminet, Paul et R.P. Jules Alberty. 1959. Dictionnaire bahnar-français. Volume 1. Hanoi/Paris, Publications de Ecôle Française d’Extrême Orient.

Guilleminet, Paul et R.P. Jules Alberty. 1963. Dictionnaire bahnar-français. Volume 2. Hanoi/Paris, Publications de l'Ecole Française d’Extrême Orient.

Guilleminet, Paul. 1952. Coutumier de la tribu Bahnar, des Sedang, et des Jarai de la province de Kontum: selon le coutume appliqué dans les tribunaux de cette province de 1908 a 1938. Hanoi/Paris, Publications de l'Ecole Française d’Extrême Orient 32.

Guilleminet, Paul. 1960. Langues spéciaux utilisées dans la tribu Bahnar du Kontum (Sud Viêt-nam, Indochine). Hanoi/Paris, Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient 50.1:117-132.

Guillon, Emmanuel. 1971. Sur 21 chansons populaires Môn. L’Homme 11.2:58-108.

Guillon, Emmanuel. 1974 Recherches sur quelques inscriptions mône, I. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 61. 339-348. [inscription found at Ban Thalat, Laos; dated by author 8th c. AD]

Guillon, Emmanuel. 1976. Some aspects of Mon syntax. in: P. N. JENNER et al. , eds., Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu, University Press of Hawaii. Vol. I. 407-421.

Guillon, Emmanuel. 1977. Recherches sur quelques inscriptions mônes, II: tablettes trouvées dans l’état Shan. III: Une inscription du XIIIe siècle, trouvée à Bassein. V: A propos d’une cloche gravée près Tavoy (Tenasserim). BEEO 64. 83-113. [MM inscriptions; 10 plates]

Guillon, Emmanuel. 1999. The Mons: a civilization of Southeast Asia. Bangkok: The Siam Society Press.

Gumperz, John, in collaboration with H.S. Biligiri. 1957. “Notes on the phonology of Mundari.” Indian Linguistics 6-15

Gupta, S.P. & Hari Mohan. 1975. “A Reconnoitrel Survey Among the Hill Kharia and Proposed Action Programme.” Bulletin of the Bihar Tribal Welfare Research Institute, 17/1:25-72

Gupta, Sunil. 2007. The Bay of Bengal Interaction Sphere (1000 BC – AD 500). Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association. 25.21-30 DOI:10.7152/bippa.v25i0.11911.

Gurden, P.R.T. 1914. The Khasis. London [Reprint: Delhi: Somo Publications, 1975]

Gurdon, Philip Richard Thornhagh. 1895. On the Khamtis. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, London.

Ha Bul 1976. Koho-Vietnamese-English Thesaurus. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications.

Hà Văn Tấn, Phạm Đức Dương. 1978. Về ngôn ngữ Tiền Việt-Mượng. Dân tộc học. Số 1. 

Hahn, Ferdinand. 1901. A Primer of the Asur Dukma. A dialect of the Kolarian Language. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal. 69.1:149-72.

Haiman, John. 2011. Cambodian Khmer. Amsterdam/Philadelphia, John Benjamins.

Haldar, Sukumar. 1917. “Ho Riddles.” Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society 3:276ff.

Hall, D. G. E. 1955. History of Southeast Asia. London, MacMillan.

Hall, Elizabeth. 2010. A Phonology of Muak Sa-aak. MA thesis, Payap University Thailand.

Hall, Kenneth. 1985. Maritime trade and state development in early Southeast Asia. Honolulu, University of Hawai’i Press.

Halle, Morris and Jean-Roger Vergnaud. 1980. Three dimensional phonology. Journal of Linguistic Research 1: 83-105.

Halle, Morris and Jean-Roger Vergnaud. 1987. An Essay on Stress. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press.

Halle, Morris and William Idsardi. 1995. General Properties of Stress and Metrical Structure. The Handbook of Phonological Theory, ed. by John Goldsmith, 403-443. Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell. 

Halliday, R. 1913. Immigration of the Mons into Siam. Journal of the Siam Society 10.3:1-13.

Halliday, R. 1917. The Talaings. Governement Press, Rangoon

Halliday, R. 1922. A Mon-English Dictionary. Siam Society, Bangkok (reprinted in 1955 by the Mon Cultural Section, Ministry of Union Culture, Government of the Union of Burma, Rangoon.)

Halliday, R. 1930. Les inscriptions Môn du Siam. Bulletin de I'Ecole Française d'Extrême-Orient 30: 81-105, Paris

Halliday, Robert. 1922. A Mon-English dictionary. Bangkok, Siam Society. xxx, 512pp., 7pp. [second edition published in 1955 by the Government of the Union of Burma, Ministry of Union Culture, Mon Cultural Section, Rangoon]

Halliday, Robert. 1929. Dictionary jottings: JBRS 19.69-71.

Halliday, Robert. 1930. Dictionary jottings: Talaing place names in Burmese. JBRS 20.22-23.

Halliday, Robert. 1930. Les inscriptions môn du siam. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 30. 81-105. [in coll. With Blagden; 10 p11.]

Halliday, Robert. 1932. The Mon inscriptions of Siam. JBRS 22. 107-119.

Hamp, Eric P. 1976. “On Mon-Khmer, Its Kin, and Principles.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13), I:423-29 

Hamp, Eric P. 1992. On misusing similarity. In Davis & Iverson (eds.) 1992, pp 95-104.

Han, Mieko S. (1966). Vietnamese vowels. Studies in the phonology of Asian languages IV. Los Angeles: Acoustic Phonetics Research Laboratory, University of Southern California. 

Hanihara, Tsunehiko, Hirofumi Matsumura, Yoshinori Kawakubo, Nguyen Lan Coung, Nguyen Kim Thuy, Marc F. Oxenham, Yukio Dodo. 2012. Population history of northern Vietnamese inferred from nonmetric cranial trait variation. Anthropological Science 120. 2:157-165.

Hanks, Lucien M., Jr., Jane R. Hanks, and Lauriston Sharp (eds.). 1965. Ethnographic Notes on Northern Thailand. Ithaca: Cornell University Southeast Asia Program, Data Paper No.58.

Hans, D. 1942. Munda Durang. Patna: United Press

Hari Mohan. 1961. “Socio-Economic Organisation and Religion among the Hill Kharia of Dhalbhum.” Bulletin of the Bihar Tribal Welfare Research Institute, Ranchi

Harmand, F. J. 2002. Laos and the Hill Tribes of Indochina: Journeys to the Boloven Plateau (translated by Walter Tips). Bangkok, White Lotus.

Harmand, Jules. 1878-79. Notes de voyage en Indo-Chine: les Kouys – Ponthey-Kakèk. Annales d’Extrême-Orient 1 : 322-339.

Harper, Jerod. 2009. “Phonological Descriptions of Plang Spoken in Man Noi, La Gang, and Bang Deng Villages (in China).” Payap University.

Harper, Jerod. 2009. Phonological Descriptions of Plang spoken in Man Noi, La Gang, and Bang Deng Villages (in China). MA thesis, Payap University.

Hashimoto, Mantaro. (1978). The current state of Sino-Vietnamese studies. Journal of Chinese Linguistics, 6, 1-26. 

Haswell,  James M. 1874. Grammatical notes and vocabulary of the Peguan language. Rangoon, American Baptist Mission Press. [second edition 1901, revised by E.O. Stevens]

Haudricourt, André G. & Francoise Ozanne- Rivierre, 1982. Dictionnaire Thématique des Langues de la Région de Hienghène (Nouvelle Calédonie). Lacito Documents Asie- Austronésie (4). Paris: SELAF.

Haudricourt, André G., 1971. New Caledonia and the Loyalty Islands. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.) Linguistics in Oceania. Current Trends in Linguistics (8), 359- 396. The Hague, Mouton.

Haudricourt, André-Georges et Louis Hédin. 1943. L'homme et les plantes cultivés. Geographie humaine, 19, Paris: Gallimard. 

Haudricourt, André-Georges. (1949). Origine des particularités de l'alphabet vietnamien. Dân Việt-Nam, 3, 61-68. 

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1952. L'origine môn-khmèr des tons en viêtnamien. Journal Asiatique 240:264-265.

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1953. La place du viêtnamien dans les langues austroasiatiques. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 49.1:122-128.

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1954. De l'origine des tons en viêtnamien. Journal Asiatique 242:69-82.

Haudricourt, André G. 1954. Comment reconstruire le Chinois Archaïque. Word 10.2-3:351-364. 

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1965. Les mutations consonantiques des occlusives initiales en Mon-Khmer. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 60(1): 160-172.

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1965. Mutation consonantique en Mon-Khmer. Bulletin de la Société Linguistique de Paris, 60:160-72. 

Haudricourt, André-Georges. 1966. The limits and connections of Austroasiatic in the northeast. Norman H. Zide (ed.). Studies in Comparative Austroasiatic Linguistics. The Hague: Mouton. pp. 44-56.

Haupers, Ralph and Fiêu Bi. 1967. Stieng Phrasebook. Santa Ana, California, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Haupers, Ralph, and Lorraine Haupers. 1991. Stieng-English Dictionary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications. 

Haupers, Ralph. 1969. Stieng phonemes. Mon-Khmer Studies 3:131-137.

Haupers, Ralph.1979a. Stieng-English Dictionary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications. 

Haupers, Ralph.1979b. Proto-Cambodian Stieng. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publication (no. 80-0014)

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 1982. The mutation of *r in pre-Thavưng. Mon-Khmer Studies 11:83-100.

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 1992. On the Track of Austric, Part I: Introduction. Mon-Khmer Studies XXI:143-77. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 1992. Vietic and Viet-Muong: a new subgrouping in Mon-Khmer. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 21:211-228.

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 1997. On the Track of Austric, Part II: Consonant Mutation in Early Austroasiatic. Mon-Khmer Studies XXVII:13-41. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 1999. On the Track of Austric, Part III: Basic Vocabulary Correspondence. Mon-Khmer Studies XXIX:1-34. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2000. Response to Blazhek's Comments. Mother Tongue V:33-4. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2000. Response to Blust's Comments. Mother Tongue V:35-7. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2000. Response to Fleming's Comments. Mother Tongue V:39-40. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2000. The Austric Denti-alveolar Sibilants. Mother Tongue V:1-12. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2001. On the Origin of Affricates in Austric. Mother Tongue VI:95-117. 

Hayes, La Vaughn H. 2001. Response to Sidwell. Mother Tongue VI:123-7. 

Headley, Robert K. 1976. Some Considerations on the Classification of Khmer. In P.N. Jenner, L.C. Thompson and S. Starosta (Ed.), Austroasiatic Studies, Honolulu, (pp. 431-452). The University Press of Hawaii.

Headley, Robert K. Jr. 1976. Some Sources of Chamic Vocabulary. In Jenner, Philip N., Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies, Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13), pp.453-476.

Headley, Robert K. Jr. 1977. A Pearic vocabulary. Mon-Khmer Studies 6:69-150.

Headley, Robert K. Jr. 1978. An English-Pearic Vocabulary. Mon-Khmer Studies 7:61-94.

Headley, Robert K. Jr. 1985. Proto-Pearic and the Classification of Pearic. In Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies presented to André-G Haudricourt. Suriya Ratanakul, David Thomas and Suwilai Premsirat (eds.), Bangkok, Mahidol University. pp 428-478. 

Headley, Robert K. Jr. 1998. Cham evidence for Khmer Sound Changes. In David Thomas (ed.) Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, No 15: Further Chamic Studies, Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp 21-29. 

Headley, Robert K. Jr. and Rath Chim. 2014. Modern Cambodian-English Dictionary. Second Edition. Hyattsville, Dunwoody Press.

Headley, Robert K. Jr., K. Chhor, L. K. Lim, L. H. Kheang, and C. Chun. 1977. Cambodian-English dictionary. 2 volumes. Washington, D.C., Catholic University of America Press.

Headley, Robert K. Jr., Rath Chim, Ok Soeum. 1997. Modern Cambodian-English dictionary. Kensington, Dunwoody Press.

Headley, Robert K., Jr. 1977. Cambodian-English Dictionary. Washington, Catholic University of American Press.

Hegeduàs, Irén, Peter Michalove & Alexis Manaster Ramer (eds.) 1997. Indo-European, Nostratic, and Beyond; Festschrift for Vitalij V. Shevoroshkin. Washington D.C, Institute for the Study of Man.

Helimski, Eugene A. 1987. A 'New Approach' to Nostratic Comparison. Review of Allan R. Bomhard, Toward Proto-Nostratic: A New Approach to the Comparison of Proto-Indo-European and Proto-Afroasiatic. Journal of the American Oriental Society 107.1:97-100.

Hembram, S. 1985. Bengali-Medium: Santali Self-Taught. Mecheda, Midnapore: Marang Buru Press. Revised by M.K. Soren

Hembrom, T. 1996. The Santals: anthropological-theological reflections on Santali & biblical creation traditions. Calcutta: Punthi Pustak

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1952. The main features of Cambodian pronunciation. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 14(2): 149-174.

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1965. “Final -k in Khasi: a secondary phonological pattern.” G.B. Milner & E.J.A. Henderson (eds.). Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies. Amsterdam: North Holland. 1:459-66.

Henderson, Eugénie. 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics o f South East Asian languages. Lingua 15:400-434.

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1966. “Khasi and the l-clusters in seventeenth century Tonkinese.” Ba Shin, Boisselier & Griswold (eds.). Essays offered to G.B. Luce (Artibus Asiae, supp. xxiii). Ascona. 139-50 

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1967. “Vowel length and vowel quality in Khasi.” Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 30:564-88

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1976. “Khasi Initial Clusters.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part I:523-538 

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1976. Vestiges of Morphology in Modern Standard Khasi. In Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Part 1. Honolulu, University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). pp.477-522 

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1985. "Feature Shuffling in Southeast Asian Languages." In Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies Presented to André-G. Haudricourt, edited by Suriya Ratanakul et al.. 1-22. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.

Henderson, Eugénie J.A. 1991. Problems and Pitfalls in the Phonetic Interpretation of Khasi Orthography. In Austroasiatic Languages, Essays in honour of H. L. Shorto, edited by Jeremy H.C.S. Davidson. 61-66. School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London.

Henderson, Eugénie. 1989-1990. Khasi clusters and Greenberg’s universals. Mon-Khmer Studies 18-19:61-66. 

Hendon, Rufus S. 1964. The reconstruction of *-ew in Proto-Malayopolynesian. Language 40:372–380

Hengeveld, Kees & Jan Rijkhoff. 2005. “Mundari as a flexible language.” Linguistic Typology 9/3:406-31

Hesterman, F. 1926. “Affixreihen des Nankauri-Nikobaresischen.” Foia ethnogloss, II:53-65 (???)

Hickley, Gerald C. 1982. Sons of the Mountains: ethnohistory of the Vietnamese Central Highlands 1957-76. New Haven, Yale University Press.

Higham, Charles 2002. Early cultures of mainland Southeast Asia. Bangkok: River Books.

Higham, Charles 2004. Mainland Southeast Asia from the Neolithic to the Iron age. In: Ian Glover & Peter Bellwood (eds.) Southeast Asia: from prehistory to history. 41-67. Abingdon: RoutledgeCurzon.

Higham, Charles. 2013.“Hunter-Gatherers in Southeast Asia: From Prehistory to the Present. Human Biology 85.1–3:21–43.

Higham, Charles. 2014. Early Mainland Southeast Asia: from First Humans to Angkor. Bangkok: River Books Co. Ltd. 

Higham, Charles. 2021. The Neolithic occupation of Southeast Asia. In Paul Sidwell and Mathias Jenny (eds.) The Languages and Linguistics of Mainland Southeast Asia: a comprehensive guide. Berlin/Boston; De Gruyter Mouton. pp. 19-31.

Hill, Jane H. 1996. “Languages on the Land: Toward an Anthropological Dialectology,” March. https://eric.ed.gov/?id=ED405732.

HIMLY, Karl. 1889. Bemerkungen über die Wortbildung des Mon. Sitzungsberichte der könglich bayrischen Akademie der Wissenschaften [philosophisch-philologische Klasse] 2.260-277.

Hinton, Peter. (ed.). 1969. Tribesmen and Peasants in North Thailand. Chieng Mai, Tribal Research Centre.

Hirsch, Philip. 1991. Environmental and Social Implications of Nam Theun Dam Laos. Economic Regional Restructuring Research Unit Working Paper No.5. Department of Geography HO3, University of Sydney.

HLA PE. 1967. A tentative list of Mon loanwords in Burmese. JBRS 50. 71-94. [arranged by subjects]

Ho, Dah-An. 1976. Tsou Phonology. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 47.2: 245-74.

Ho, Dah-An. 1983. The position of Rukai in Formosan languages. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, 54.1: 121-68.

Hoàng Tuệ, Lý Toàn Thắng, Tạ Văn Thông, et. al. 1986. Ngữ pháp Tiếng Kơho [A Grammar of Koho]. Lam Dong, Vietnam: Sở Văn Hóa và Thông Tin Lâm Đông. 

Hockett, Charles. 1955. A Manual of Phonology. Baltimore, Waverly Press Inc.

Hodgson, Brian Houghton. 1853. on the Indo-Chinese borderers and their connexion with the Himalayans and Tibetans. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 22.1.25. [pp. 19-25 Mon vocabulary by Dr. Morton, missionary in lower Burma. repr. in: id. Miscellaneous essays relating to Indian subjects, London Trübner, 1880, Vol. 2pp. 27-50]

Hoffman, John. 1903. Mundari grammar. Calcutta. (separate publisher not listed)

Hoffmann, John & Arthur van Emelen. 1928-37. Encyclopedia Mundarica (16 volumes). Patna: Government Superintendent Printing [Reprint: New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House, 1990]

Hoffmann, John. 1893. A Mundari first reader. Calcutta

Hoffmann, John. 1903. Mundari Grammar. Calcutta: Bengal Secretariat Press

Hoffmann, John. 1905/1909. A Mundari Grammar with exercises. Part I, II. Calcutta: M. Apel [Reprint: 2001: New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House]

Hoijer, Harry. 1956. Lexicostatistics: a critique. Language 32:49-60.

HOLLE, K.F. 1882. Tabel van oud- en Nieuw-Indische alphabetten: bijdrage tot de palaeographie van Nederlandsch-Indië. Batavia, W. Bruining; ’S Hage, M. Nijhoff. [lists Mon script]

Hollyman, K.J., 1960. A checklist of Oceanic languages (Melanesia, Micronesia, New Guinea, Polynesia). (Te Reo Monographs), Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Holm, Hans. 2003. The proportionality trap or what is wrong with lexicostatistical subgrouping. Indogermanische Forschungen 108:38-46.

Holmer, Arthur. 2005a. ‘Verb serialization in Kammu’. Working papers (Dept. of Linguistics, Lund University) 51, 65–84.

Holmer, Arthur.2005b. ‘Vandringar i kammugrammatikens djungel’ [Wanderings in the jungle of Kammu grammar]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 168–74.

Hombert, Jean-Marie. 1977. Development of tones from vowel height? Journal of Phonetics 5:9-16.

Hoogervorst, Tom. 2012. “Southeast Asia in the Ancient Indian Ocean World:” Http://purl.org/dc/dcmitype/Text, Oxford University, UK. https://ora.ox.ac.uk/objects/uuid:b8b47816-7184-42ab-958e-026bc3431ea3.

Hook, Peter. 1991. “The Compound Verb in Munda: An Areal and Typological Overview.” Anvita Abbi, ed. India as a Linguistic Area Revisited. Special number of Language Sciences 13.2:181-95

Hoshino, Tatsuo. 2002. Wen Dan and its Neighbours: The Central Mekong Valley in the Seventh and Eighth Centuries. In Breaking new Grounds in Lao History, Essays on the Seventh to

Houlton, john. 1949. Bihar The Heart Of India. Bombay: Orient Longmans. http://archive.org/details/in.ernet.dli.2015.100326.

House, David, Anastasia Karlsson, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 2009a. ‘On utterance-final intonation in tonal and non-tonal dialects of Kammu’. Proceedings of Fonetik 2009, 78–81. Stockholm University.

House, David. 1999. ‘Perception of pitch and tonal timing: implications for mechanisms of tonogenesis’. In John J. Ohala, Yoko Hasegawa, Manjari Ohala, Daniel Granville & Ashlee C. Bailey (eds.), Proceedings of the 14th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, 1823–26. Berkeley: University of California, Berkeley.

House, David. 2005. ‘Fonetiska undersökningar av kammu’ [Phonetic investigations of Kammu]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 164–67.

House, David. 2009b. ‘The phrase-final accent in Kammu: effects of tone, focus and engagement’. Proceedings of Interspeech 2009, 2439–42. Brighton.

Hovelacque, Abel. 1880. “La Langue Khasis étudiée sans la rapport de l’évolution des formes.” Revue de linguistique 14:20-50 (Paris)

Hoverlacque, Abel. 1880. La Langue khasia, étudiée sous le rapport de l'évolution des formes. Paris, Mainsonneuve et Cie

Hsin, Tien-Hsin. 2000. Consonant clusters in Tsou and their theoretical implications. Proceedings of the 18th West Coast Conference on Formal Linguistics, ed. by Sonya Bird, Andrew Carnie, Jason D. Haugen and Peter Norquest, Cascadilla Press.

Hsin, Tien-Hsin. to appear. Rhythmic Vowel Deletions in Tsou. Proceedings of ESCOL ’99. University of Connecticut, Storrs.

Hsiu, Andrew. 2016.  A preliminary reconstruction of Proto-Pakanic. Payap University, manuscript.

Htun Shwe. 1968. [mun kyauksa abhidhan.] Dictionary of Mon inscriptions]. Rangoon, [Universities Mon Literature and Cultural Affairs Sub-Committee] [xiv], 48pp., 83pp., v. [OM, MM, LM/SM – Burm. glossary, and Burm,- Mon glossary, based contact words, IA loans]

Htun Tha. 1918. Peguan or Mon first standard reader with Burmese translation. Rangoon, Irrawaddy Press. 108pp.

Hualde, José, Joseba Lakarra & Robert. L. Trask (eds.). 1995. Towards a History of the Basque Language. Amsterdam & Philadelphia, John Benjamins Publishing Company

Huffman, Franklin E. 1970. Modern Spoken Cambodian. New Haven/London, Yale University Press.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1971. Vocabulary Lists (Mon-Khmer) 20 languages. Archived online at: http://sealang.net/archives/huffman

Huffman, Franklin E. 1973. Thai and Cambodian: a case of syntactic borrowing. Journal of the American Oriental Society 93.4:488-509.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1976. The register problem in fiftheen Mon-Khmer languages. Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part I: 575-589.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1976. The Relevance of Lexicostatistics to Mon-Khmer Languages. Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part I:539-74 

Huffman, Franklin E. 1977. An Examination of Lexical Correspondences between Vietnamese and Some Other Austro-Asiatic Languages. Lingua 43:171-198.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1978. On the centrality of Katuic-Bahnaric to Austroasiatic. Paper presented at 2nd International Confernece on Austroasiatic, Mysore (India) December 18-21, 1978. Achived at https://sites.google.com/view/paulsidwell/the-sical-papers

Huffman, Franklin E. 1978. Synchronic evidence for the history of Khmer vowels. Paper presented at 2nd International Confernece on Austroasiatic, Mysore (India) December 18-21, 1978.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1985. The Phonology of Chong, A Mon-Khmer Language of Thailand. In Surya Ratanakul, David Thomas, & Suwilai Premsrirat (eds.) Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies presented to André-G. Haudricourt. Bangkok, Mahidol University. pp. 355-388.

Huffman, Franklin E. 1985. Vowel Permutations in Austroasiatic Languages. Linguistics of the Sino-Tibetan Area: The State of the Art. Pacific Linguistics Series C-No.87. Canberra: Australian National University, pp141-45.

Huffman, Franklin E. and Im Proum. 1978. English-Khmer Dictionary. New Haven, Yale University Press. 

Huffmann, Franklyn. 1986. Bibliography and index of mainland Southeast Asian languages and linguistics. New Haven and London, Yale University Press.

HUNTER, [sir] William Wilson. 1868. A comparative dictionary of the languages of India and High Asia, with a dissertation besed on the Hodgson lists, official records, and mss. Landon. Trübner.

Hunter, William Wilson. 1868. The Annals of Rural Bengal. London: Smith, Elder and Co.

HURER, Edouard. 1911. Etudes Indochinoises, VI. Les bas-reliefs du temple d’Ananda à Pagan. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 11.1-5.

Idsardi, William. 1992. The Computation of Prosody. Cambridge, Mass.: Ph.D. dissertation, MIT.

Illich-Svitych, V. M. 1971. Opyt sravnenija nostraticheskix jazykov (semitoxamitskij, kartvel’skij, indoevropejskij, ural'skij, altajskij). Slovar’ b-K. Moskva, Nauka.

Illich-Svitych, V. M. 1976. Opyt sravnenija nostraticheskix jazykov (semitoxamitskij, kartvel’skij, indoevropejskij, ural'skij, altajskij). Sravnitelnyj slovar’ l-z. Moskva, Nauka.

Illich-Svitych, V. M. 1984. Opyt sravnenija nostraticheskix jazykov (semitoxamitskij, kartvel’skij, indoevropejskij, ural'skij, altajskij). Sravnitelnyj slovar’ p-q. Moskva, Nauka.

International Encyclopedia of Linguistics 1992. ed. by William Bright. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Isara, Choosri. 2002. Dialects of Chong. Mon-Khmer Studies 32: 55-70.

Isara, Choosri. 2004. Chaak and other Chong place names: linguistics remains of a Mon-Khmer people in Eastern Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies 34: 67-77.

Isara, Choosri. 2007. Investigating Contact-induced Language Change : Cases of Chung (Saoch) in Thailand and Cambodia. Thesis, Mahidol University.

Isara, Choosri. 2009. Chung (Saoch) of Thailand and Cambodia: phonological and lexical comparisions. Mon-Khmer Studies 38: 69‑85. 

Isarangkun Na Ayutthaya, Phunsap. 1984. “A Relational Grammar Analysis of the Buriram Dialect of Northern Khmer.” Mahidol University.

Isarangura, Nai Noe. 1935. Vocabulary of Chawng words collected in Krat Province. The Journal of the Siam Society 28: 173-186.

Iverson, Gregory K. & Joseph C. Salmons. 1992. The phonology of Proto-Indo-European root structure constraints. Lingua 87:293-320.

Izikowitz, K. G. 1951. Lamet: Hill peasants in French Indochina. Etnologika studier, 17. Götenborg.

Jabatan Hal Ehwal Orang Asli. 2005. Orang Asli. http://www.jheoa.gov.my/e‑orangasli.htm (22 May 2005).

Jackson, F.H., 1983. The internal and external relationships of the Trukic languages of Micronesia. PhD dissertation: University of Hawaii.

Jacob, Judith M. 1960. The Structure of the word in Old Khmer. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 23:351-368.

Jacob, Judith M. 1963. Prefixation and Infixation in Old Mon, Old Khmer, and Modern Khmer. In Shorto (ed.) (1963), pp 62-70.

Jacob, Judith M. 1965. Notes on the numerals and numeral coefficients in Old, Middle, and Modern Khmer. In Milner G.B. and Eugénie J.A. Henderson (eds.). Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies (Lingua 14-15). Amsterdam, North Holland Publishing Co., pp143-162.

Jacob, Judith M. 1968. Introduction to Cambodian. London, Oxford University Press. 

Jacob, Judith M. 1974. A Concise Cambodian-English Dictionary. London, Oxford University Press.

Jacob, Judith M. 1976. Some problems arising from the orthography of consonants on the Khmer inscriptions. In Jenner et al. (eds.) (1976a) pp 625-58.

Jacob, Judith M. 1993. The structure of the word in Old Khmer, in D.A. Smyth (ed.) Cambodian Linguistics, Literature and History, pp. 1-17. School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London.

Jacob, Judith M. 1963. Prefixation and infixation in Old Mon, Old Khmer and modern Khmer. In H. L. Shorto (ed.) Linguistic comparison in South East Asia and the Pacific. London, School of Oriental and African Studies, pp.62-70.

Jacob, Judith M. 1993. Notes on the numerals and numeral coefficients on Old, Middle, and Modern Khmer. In David A. Smyth (ed.) Cambodian Linguistics, Literature and History. School of Oriental and African Studies, University of London. pp. 27-43.

Jacobsen, Vurnell. 1961. Cham-Mon-Khmer Cognates. Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota.

Jacq, Pascale & Paul Sidwell, 1999. Sapuan (səpuar). München, Lincom Europa.

Jacq, Pascale and Paul Sidwell. 2000. A Comparative West Bahnaric Dictionary. München, Lincom Europa.

Jacq, Pascale. 2001. A Description of Jruq (Loven): a Mon-Khmer language of the Lao PDR. MA thesis, Australian National University.

Jakhontov, Sergej E. 1977. In defence of Austro-Thai. In Vjacheslav Ivanov (ed.) Konferencija 'Nostraticheskie jazyki i nostraticheskoe jazykoznanie '. Moscow: Nauka.  pp. 50-5 l.

Janzen, Herman and Margarete Janzen. 1972. Grammar analysis of Pale clauses and phrases. Journal of the Burma Research Society 55.1-2:47-99.

Jenner, Philip and Paul Sidwell. 2010. Old Khmer Grammar. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Jenner, Philip N. and Saveros Pou. 1980-81. A lexicon of Khmer morphology. Mon-Khmer Studies 9-10. 

Jenner, Philip N., Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, 2 Vols. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13).

Jenner, Philip Norman. 1969. Affixation in Modern Khmer. Ph. D dissertation, University of Hawaii.

Jenner, Philip Norman. 1980-86. A Chrestomathy of Pre-Angkorian Khmer. Southeast Asia Paper No. 20, Parts 1-4, Honolulu, University of Hawaii.

Jenner, Phillip. 1974. The Development of the Registers in Standard Khmer, in N.D. Liem (ed.) South-east Asian Linguistic Studies Vol. 1, vol. 1, pp. 47-60. Pacific Linguistics, the Australian National University

Jenner, Phillip. 2009a. A Dictionary of pre-Angkorian Khmer. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Jenner, Phillip. 2009b. A Dictionary of Angkorian Khmer. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Jenner, Philip. 2011. A dictionary of Middle Khmer. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Jenny, Mathias and Patrick McCormick. 2014. Old Mon. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.). 2014. The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp. 519-552.

Jenny, Mathias and Paul Sidwell (eds.). 2014. The handbook of Austroasiatic languages (2 vols.). Leiden and Boston, Brill.

Jenny, Mathias 2014. Modern Mon. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. pp.553-600.

Jenny, Mathias. 2020. Verb-Initial Structures in Austroasiatic Languages. In Mathias Jenny, Paul Sidwell, Mark Alves (eds.). Austroasiatic Syntax in Areal and Diachronic Perspective. Leiden/Boston: Brill. pp. 21-45.

Jenny, Mathias. 2015. Syntactic diversity and change in Austroasiatic languages. In Viti, Carlotta (ed.) Perspectives on historical syntax. Amsterdam/Philadelphia: John Benjamins. pp. 317–340.

Jenny, Mathias. 2005. The Verb System of Mon. Zurich, Universität Zürich.

Jiang, L. and L. Liu 2006. New evidence for origins of sedentism and rice domestication in the Lower Yangzi River. China. Antiquity, 80, 355–361.

Jimreivat, Pattiya. 1981. “Clauses and Phrases in Bruu.” Mahidol University.

Jin L, Seielstad M, Xiao C. 2001. Genetic, linguistic, and archaeological perspectives on human diversity in Southeast Asia. New Jersy: World Scientific.

Jirananthanaporn, Supatra (สุพัตรา จิรนันทนาภรณ์). 1993. “Lexical geography of minority languages in Nan province: Pray and Mal dialects / ภูมิศาสตร์ภาษาชนกลุ่มน้อยในจังหวัดน่าน : การศึกษาโดยใช้ศัพท์กรณีถิ่นไปรและถิ่นมัล.” Naresuan University.

Johnston, Beulah M. 1976. Kuy Phonemes and orthography: Language planning in ten minority languages of Thailand, ed. by William A. Smalley, 259–272. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics C-43. 

Johnston, Richard. 1969. Kuy basic word list. Mon-Khmer Studies 3:1–4. 

Johnstone, Patrick, and Jason Mandryk. 2001. Operation World: 21st Century Edition. Carlisle, UK: Paternoster Publishing. 

Johnstone, Patrick. 1993. Operation World. Carlisle, UK: OM Publishing. 

Jones, Charles (ed.). 1993. Historical Linguistics: Problems and Perspectives. London & New York, Longman.

Jones, Charles. 1989. A History of English Phonology. London & New York, Longman.

Jones, Robert B. 1970. Classifier constructions in Southeast Asia. Journal of the American Oriental Society 90.1:1-12. 

Jones, Russel (ed.). 2007. Loan-Words in Indonesian and Malay. Jakarta: KITLV.

Jorksamutr, Phramaha Jaroon (จรูญ จอกสมุทร). 1996. “Lexical usage and syntax in Mon / การศึกษาการใช้คำและการเรียงคำในภาษามอญ.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56548&language=thai.

Jungprasert, Chollada. 1986. “Clauses in So (Bru) of Dong Luang, Mukdahan Province =: อนุประโยคของภาษาโซ่ (บรู) ที่อำเภอดงหลวง จังหวัดมุกดาหาร.” Mahidol University.

K.S. Nagaraja and Kashyap Mankodi (eds.). 2010. Austro-Asiatic Linguistics: In memory of R. Elangaiyan, Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages.

Kaewklom, Suranee (สุรนี แก้วกลม). 1980. “Khmer script used to write Thai language / อักษรขอมที่ใช้บันทึกภาษาไทย.” Silpakorn University.

Kaewnon, Paramapanot (ปรมปณต แก้วนนท์). 2007. “Evidence of ancient Khmer culture in Nakhon Pathom province / ร่องรอยหลักฐานวัฒนธรรมเขมรโบราณในจังหวัดนครปฐม.” Silpakorn University.

Kak, Neeraj. 1978. “Form of Addresses in Khasi Language.” Abstracts, Vol. 2, Xth International Congress of Anthropological and Ethnological Sciences, New Delhi

Kalipke, Hans and Mohamad Agar Kalipke. 2001. Wörterbuch Sakai-Indonesisch-Deutsch. Hamburg: Buske.

Kamnuansin, Sunee. 2002. “Kasong Syntax =: ไวยากรณ์ภาษากะซอง.” Mahidol University.

Kane, P. V. 1962-75. History of Dharmasastra. I.I (1968), 1.2 (1975), II. 1-2 (1974), III (1973), V.I (1974), V.2 (1962). Poona: Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute.

Kanika Kenikanon & al. 1979. Chong. Bangkok, Bannakij. [in Thai]

Karlgren, Bernhard. 1940. Grammata Serica. Stockholm, The Bulletin of the Museum of Far Eastern Antiquities No. 12.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House & Damrong Tayanin. 2008. ‘Recognizing phrase and utterance as prosodic units in non-tonal dialects of Kammu’. Proceedings of Fonetik 2008, 89–92. Department of Linguistics, University of Gothenburg.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 2012. ‘Intonation adapts to lexical tone: the case of Kammu’. Phonetica 69, 28–47.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 2015. ‘Prosodic signaling of information and discourse structure from a typological perspective’. In Proceedings of the 18th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences. University of Glasgow.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 2007a. ‘Boundary signaling in tonal and non-tonal dialects of Kammu’. Proceedings of Fonetik 2007 (TMH-QPSR 50:1), 117–20.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 2007b. ‘Prosodic phrasing in tonal and non-tonal dialects of Kammu’. Proceedings 16th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, 1309–12. Saarbrücken.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 2010. ‘Influence of lexical tones on intonation in Kammu’. Interspeech 2010, 1740–43. Makuhari, Japan.

Karlsson, Anastasia, David House, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 2011. ‘Comparison of F0 range in spontaneous speech in Kammu tonal and non-tonal dialects’. Proceedings of the 17th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, 1026–29. Hong Kong.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Håkan Lundström & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 2014. ‘Preservation of lexical tones in singing in a tone language’ Proceedings of Interspeech 2014, Singapore, 1357-1360.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Håkan Lundström, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Siri Tuttle. 2014. ‘Speech and song: investigating the borderland’. In Gerda Lechleitner & Christian Liebl (eds.), Jahrbuch des Phonogrammarchivs der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften 4, 142–179. Wien: Cuvillier Verlag.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Jan-Olof Svantesson & David House. 2012. ‘Adaptation of focus to lexical tone and phrasing in Kammu’. Proceedings of TAL 3, O3-01. Nanjing, China.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Jan-Olof Svantesson & David House. 2013. ‘Multifunctionality of prosodic boundaries in spontaneous narratives in Kammu’. Proceedings Prosody-Discourse Interface 2013. Leuven.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Jan-Olof Svantesson & David House. 2014. ‘Prosodic boundaries and discourse structure in Kammu’. In Mattias Heldner (ed.), Proceedings from Fonetik 2014, Stockholm, June 9-11, 2014 (Perilus 24), 71–76. Stockholm University.

Karlsson, Anastasia, Jan-Olof Svantesson, David House & Damrong Tayanin. 2011. ‘Tone restricts F0 range and variation in Kammu’. Proceedings of Fonetik 2011 (TMH–QPSR 51), 53–55. Stockholm.

Karlsson, Anastasia. 2011. ‘Prosodic features of Kammu tonal and non-tonal dialects: read and spontaneous speech’. In Endō Mitsuaki 遠藤光曉 & Saitō Yoshio 斎藤純男 (eds.), Tone, accent and intonation in eastern Eurasian languages: the 18th meeting of the Linguistic circle for the study of Eastern Eurasian languages, 19–28. Tokyo: Aoyama Gakuin University.

Karmin, M Monika et al. 2015. A recent bottleneck of Y chromosome diversity coincides with a 421 global change in culture. Genome Research 25:459–466. Supplemental material: http://genome.cshlp.org/content/suppl/2015/02/18/gr.186684.114.DC1.

Kashyap, VK, Saurav Guha, T. Sitalaximi, G. Hima Bindu, Seyed E. Hasnain, and R. Trivedi. 2006. “Genetic Structure of Indian Populations Based on Fifteen Autosomal Microsatellite Loci.” BMC Genetics 7: 28. https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-2156-7-28.

Kashyap, VK, T Sitalaximi, BN Sarkar, and R Trivedi. 2003. “Molecular Relatedness of the Aboriginal Groups of Andaman and Nicobar Islands with Similar Ethnic Populations.” International Journal of Human Genetics 3: 5–11.

Kasuga, Atsushi. 1994. A Study on Arem Phonology. Master’s thesis submitted to Tokyo University. 

Kasuga, Atsushi. 2008. Arem Vocabulary. Manuscript, organized in order Vietnamese-AremEnglish. 

Kaye, Jonathan and Jean Lowenstamm. 1984. De La syllabicité. Forme sonore du language: Structure des représentations en phonologie. ed. by François Dell et al., 123-59. Paris: Hermann.

Kayser M, Brauer S, Weiss G, Schiefenhovel W, Underhill P, Shen P, Oefner P, Tommaseo-Ponzetta M, Stoneking M. 2003. Reduced Y-chromosome, but not mitochondrial DNA, diversity in human populations from West New Guinea. Am J Hum Genet 2003, 72:281-302.

Keane, Augustus Henry. 1880. On the relations of the Indo-Chinese and Indo-Oceanic races and languages. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland, 9:254-289.

Keller, Charles & Sally Keller. 1977. Brao Language (Cambodia), Brao Rhymed Vocabulary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Keller, Charles. 1974. Vietnam Word Lists:Brao. Copy held at Summer Instutute of Linguistics Library Bangkok, folder 495.956.

Keller, Charles. 1976. A Grammatical Sketch of Brao: A Mon-Khmer Language. MA Thesis, University of North Dakota. Workpapers of the Summer Insititute of Linguistics: University of North Dakota Session, Vol 20, supplement 1.

Keller, Charles. 1977. Brao Vocabulary, Language Lessons, Miscellaneous Field Notes. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Keller, Charles. 1982a. Southeast Asia Word Lists (revised 1980): Tampuon. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Keller, Charles. 1982b. Preliminary Grammar Questionaire (Mahidol University, 1980): Tampuon. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

kerket.t.â, khist pyârâ. 1990. jujhair d.â~r. (khar.iyâ nât.ak). râcî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerket.t.â, roj & pyârâ kerket.t.â. 1990. lodaro somadhi kahânî sa~grah. râ~cî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerket.t.â, roj, sa~tos. kerket.t.â, nuas kerket.t.â, pyârâ kerket.t.â, lore~ng t.et.e & kusum kerket.t.â. 1990. hepad. avakar.iny ber. kher.iyâ kavitâ sa~grah eva~ lok kathâe~. râcî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerket.t.â, roj. 1990. khar.iyâ niba~dh sa~grah. râ~cî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerket.t.â, roj. 1990. si~koy sulo?. bhâs.â sâhitya patra. râ~cî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerket.t.â, sa~tos. & roj kerket.t.â. 1990. khar.iyâ gadya-padya sa~grah (bhâs.â-sâhitya). râ~cî: janjâtîya bhâs.â akâdamî, bihâr sarkâr

kerkeTA, nuas. 1995. khaRiyA naMdanI (khaRiyA itihAs). sundargaDh, mahesIDIhI: amRt jIvan dAn bAge.

Kerketta, Ilias. in progress. Kharia-Hindi/Hindi-Kharia Dictionary. Ranchi

Kerketta, Noas, Eliyas D. Barva & Raphael Indvar. 1948. prabhua? patar. Ranchi

Kern, H., 1906. Taalvergelijkende Verhandeling over het Aneityumsch met een Aanhangsel over het Klankstelsel van het Eromanga. Amsterdam: Muller.

Khamlueharn, Jandeang (จันท์แดง คำลือหาญ). 1989. “Pallava palaeography in Northeastern Thai inscriptions / อักขรวิทยาอักษรปัลวะในศิลาจารึกอีสาน.” Srinakharinwirot University.

Khanittanan, Wilaiwan Wichienrot. 1973. The influence of Thai in five Lao dialects. PhD. Thesis, University of Michigan.

Khanittanan, Wilaiwan. 2004. Khmero-Thai: The great change in the history of the Thai language of the Chao Phraya Basin, in  Somsonge Burusphat (ed.) Papers from the Eleventh Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. Tempe, Arizona. Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies. pp. 375-391. 

Khar.iya along, gosnars eve~jelikal lutharan mand.li kiya?thom kabtibd.omsi?. 2nd edition, revised. 1953. editor unknown. Ranchi

Kharkongngor, Iarington. 1968. Ka Dienshonhi. Shillong: Ri Khasi Press (A Khasi-Khasi Dictionary, in Khasi).

Khatshima, Kangvol (กังวล คัชชิมา). 2005. “Pali-Sanskrit loanwords in Khmer language / คำยืมบาลีสันสกฤตในภาษาเขมร.” Silpakorn University.

Khonthet, Prachern (ประเชิญ คนเทศ). 1985. “A description of Mon language of Cetrew, Samutsakhorn: an Austroasiatic language in Thailand / ภาษามอญ ตำบลเจ็ดริ้ว จังหวัดสมุทรสาคร.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55758&language=thai.

Khyriem, Barika. 2012. A comparative study of some regional dialects of Khasi language a lexical and phonological study. PhD thesis, North Eastern Hill University, Shillong.

Kim, Nam. 2013. Lasting monuments and durable institutions: labor, urbanism, and statehood in Northern Vietnam and beyond. Journal of Archaeological Research 21.3:217–267. 

Kingsada, Thongpheth & Ryuichi Kosaka 1999. Khabit. In Kingsada, Thongpheth & Tadahiko (eds.) Basic voabularies of the Languages spoken in Phongxaly, Lao P. D. R., Tokyo, ILCAA. pp.297-317

Kingston, John. 2011. Tonogenesis. In Blackwell Companion to Phonology, v. 4, edited by Marc van Oostendorp, Colin J. Ewen, Elizabeth Hume, and Keren Rice, pp. 2304-2333.

Kingston, John. 2011. Tonogenesis. In Blackwell Companion to Phonology, v. 4, edited by Marc van Oostendorp, Colin J. Ewen, Elizabeth Hume, and Keren Rice, pp. 2304-2333.

Kingwell-Banham, E. J. 2015. “Early Rice Agriculture in South Asia. Identifying Cultivation Systems Using Archaeobotany.” Doctoral, UCL (University College London). http://discovery.ucl.ac.uk/1470410/.

Kingwell-Banham, Eleanor Emma Karoune nee Harvey, Rabindra Kumar Mohanty and Dorian Q. Fuller. 2018. Archaeobotanical Investigations into Golbai Sasan and Gopalpur, Two Neolithic-Chalcolithic Settlements of Odisha. Ancient Asia, 9: 5, pp. 1–14, DOI: https://doi.org/10.5334/aa.164

Kinshuk, Rudra. ca. 1997. Songs of the wild birds: a collection of Santal folk songs. Transcreated by Rudra Kinshuk. Calcutta: Writers Workshop

Kirk, Neile A. & Paul J. Sidwell. 1995. Review of Vitaly Shevoroshkin (ed.) Dene-Sino-Caucasian Languages. Bochum 1991. Mother Tongue 23:57-60.

Kirkpatrick, Lilla. 1972. “Rhetorical questions in Korku of Central India.” Notes on Translation, Santa Ana, Wycliffe Bible Translators. 44:28-39 

Kiro, Hermann (ed.). 1978. “Tardi” (Light). Quarterly Journal of the Kharia Sahitya Samiti

Kiro, Hermann. 1977. Kharia Baru Kayom, Kersel. Ranchi: Annapurna Press and Process

Kisku, D. Barka. 2000. The Santals and their Ancestors. Dumka: Career Press

Kisku, P.C. & K.R. Soren. 1951. santAlI SabdakoS. Deoghar: Santal Paharia Seva Mandal

Kivisild, T., S. Rootsi, M. Metspalu, S. Mastana, K. Kaldma, J. Parik, E. Metspalu, et al. 2003. “The Genetic Heritage of the Earliest Settlers Persists Both in Indian Tribal and Caste Populations.” The American Journal of Human Genetics 72 (2): 313–32. https://doi.org/10.1086/346068.

Kleineberger, H.R., 1957. A bibliography of Oceanic linguistics. (London Orienmtal Bibliographies, Vol. 1), London: Oxford University Press.

Koerner, E. F. Konrad. 1989. Comments on reconstructions in historical linguistics. In Theo Vennemann (ed.) (1989), pp 3-15.

Kommala, Chinda. 1978a. Southeast Asia Word List (revised): Loveh. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok, folder 495.956

Kommala, Chinda. 1978b. Preliminary Grammar Questionaire: Oi. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok, folder 495.956

Kommala, Chinda. 1978c. Preliminary Grammar Questionaire: Nyahuen. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok, folder 495.956

Kommala, Chinda. 1979. Southeast Asia Word List (revised): Alak. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Kongsawang, Palita. 2002. “Lexical Variations of Khmu Spoken by People of Different Age Groups at Hintum Village, Banrai District, Uthaithani Province =: ลักษณะการแปรคำศัพท์ของภาษาขมุ ซึ่งพูดโดยชาวขมุที่มีอายุต่างกันที่บ้านหินตุ้ม อำเภอบ้านไร่ จังหวัดอุทัยธานี.” Mahidol University.

Konnow, Sten. 1904. The Kurku dialect of the Munda family of speech. Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society pp. 423-37.

Konow, Sten. 1904. Mundas and Australians. ZDMG 58:147-57

Konow, Sten. 1904. Mundas and Dravidas. Indian Antiquary 33:121-5

Konow, Sten. 1909. Himalayan Languages. In (G. A. Grierson ed.) Linguistic Survey of India 3.1, Calcutta: supperintendent of Government Printing. pp. 177-179

Koppers, Wilhelm. 1939. “Munda und Sidolo bei den Korkus in Vorderindien. Auf den Spuren des altindischen pferdeopfers.” Festschrift zum 50-jährigen Bestandsjubiläum des Missionshauses St. Gabriel. Wien-Nodling (Sankt Gabrieler Studien, VIII). 541-50

Koppers, Wilhelm. 1942. “Meine völkerkundliche Forschungsreise zu den Primitivstämmen Zentralindiens, 1938/89.” Internationales Archiv für Ethnographie XLI:141-52 (Über Nahali, 149f.)

Koshy, Anish. 2008. Indefinite pronouns in Pnar. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 39:41-56. 

Kosiyakul, Kanjawat (กาญจวัฒน์ โกสิยกุล). 2004. “Lexical usage of Mon by three generations in Bang-Kra-Dee at Bang Khun Tian District, Bangkok / วิเคราะห์การใช้คำของคนสามระดับอายุในภาษามอญบางกระดี่ เขตบางขุนเทียนจังหวัดกรุงเทพมหานคร.” Silpakorn University.

Kruspe, Nicole D. 2004. A grammar of Semelai. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Kruspe, Nicole, Niclas Burenhult,  Ewelina Wnuk. 2014. Northern Aslian. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds). The Handbook of Austroasiatic Languages. Leiden: Brill. pp. 419-474.

Kruspe, Nicole. 2010. A Dictionary of Mah Meri as Spoken at Bukit Bangkong. University of Hawai’i Press. https://muse.jhu.edu/book/830.

Kruspe, Nicole. 2014. Semaq Beri. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds). The Handbook of Austroasiatic Languages. Leiden: Brill. pp. 475-516.

Kruszewski, Mikolaj. 1995. Writings in General Linguistics. John Benjamins, Amsterdam & Philadelphia.

Kuang, Jiangjing. 2013. Phonation in Tonal Contrasts. PhD thesis. University of Californis at Los Angeles.

Kuhn, Ernst Wilhelm Adalbert. 1889. Beiträge zur Sprachenkunde Hinterindiens. Sitzungsberichte der Bayerischen Akademie der Wissenschaft, Philosophisch-historische Klasse, München, 1:189-236.

Kuiper, F. B. J. 1948. “Munda and Indonesian.” Orientalia Neerlandica, Leiden: A.W. Sijthoff’s Uitgerverschmaatschappij

Kuiper, F. B. J. 1948. Proto-Munda words in Sanskrit. Amsterdam, Noord-Hollandsche Maatchappij.

Kuiper, F. B. J. 1950. An Austro-Asiatic myth in the RV. Amsterdam: Noord-Hollandsche Uitgevers Maatschappij.

Kuiper, F. B. J. 1962. Nahali: A Comparative Study. Amsterdam: N.V. Noord-Hollandsche Uitgevers Maatschappij (Mededelingen der Koninklijke Nederlandse Akademie van Wetenschappen: Afd. Letterkunde; N.R. 25,5)

Kuiper, F. B. J. 1965. Consonant variation in Munda. In Milner & Henderson (eds.) (1965), pp 54-87.

Kulachol, Darunee. 1986. “The Phonology of So at Amphoe Dongluang, Mukdahan Province=: ระบบเสียงภาษาโซ่ ที่อำเภอดงหลวง จังหวัดมุกดาหาร.” Mahidol University.

Kulke, Hermann. 1993. “‘A Passage to India’: Temples, Merchants and the Ocean.” Journal of the Economic and Social History of the Orient 36 (2): 154–80. https://doi.org/10.2307/3632507.

Kullu, Paulus. 1981. khaRiyA-vyAkaraN evaM saMkZipt SabdakoS. rAMcI: dhArmik sAhitya samiti.

Kullu, Paulus. 1992. khaRiyA dharam pothI. tonme kol-Angre. 

Mudar KM. 1999. How many Dvaravati kingdoms? Locational analysis of first millennium a.d. moated settlements in central Thailand. Journal of. Anthropological Archaeology 18:1–28.

Kumar, Sudhir. 2004. The Birhors of Chotanagpur Region (A Study in Tribal Geography). New Delhi: Rajesh Publications

Kumar, Vikrant, and B. Mohan Reddy. 2003. “Status of Austro-Asiatic Groups in the Peopling of India: An Exploratory Study Based on the Available Prehistoric, Linguistic and Biological Evidences.” Journal of Biosciences 28 (4): 507–22.

Kumar, Vikrant, ANS Reddy, JP Babu, T Nageswar Rao, K Thangaraj, AG Reddym, Lalji Singh, and BM Ready. 2008. “Molecular Genetic Study on the Status of Transitional Groups of Central India: Cultural Diffusion or Demic Diffusion?”

Kumar, Vikrant, Arimanda NS Reddy, Jagedeesh P. Babu, Tipirisetti N. Rao, Banrida T. Langstieh, Kumarasamy Thangaraj, Alla G. Reddy, Lalji Singh, and Battini M. Reddy. 2007. “Y-chromosome evidence suggests a common paternal heritage of Austro-Asiatic populations.” BMC Evolutionary Biology 7: 47. https://doi.org/10.1186/1471-2148-7-47.

Kumprasit, Maturot (มธุรส คุ้มประสิทธิ์). 2010. “A comparative study of temporal expressions in Bangkok Thai and Sakai Taenaen at Pa Bon district, Phatthalung province / การศึกษาเปรียบเทียบวิธีการบอกเวลาในภาษาไทยกรุงเทพฯ กับภาษาซาไกแต็นแอ๊น ที่อำเภอป่าบอน จังหวัดพัทลุง.” นครปฐม: Silpakorn University.

Kunstadter, Peter. 1967. Southeast Asia Tribes, Minorities and nations. 2 volumes. Princeton: Princeton University Press.

Kunwadee Phaetphithak. 1996. Phaasaa Chong Muu Baan Khlong Saeng, Tambon Dan Chumphon,

Kuo, Ching-Hua. 1979. Budai Complementation. Taipei: M.A. thesis, Fu-Jen Catholic University.

Kussalanupap, Kingkarn (กิ่งกาญจน์ กุสสลานุภาพ). 1999. “Word-classes comparison study between Chong language and standard Thai language / การศึกษาเปรียบเทียบหมวดคำในภาษาชองกับภาษาไทยมาตรฐาน.” Bachelor’s Thesis, Thaksin University. http://kb.tsu.ac.th/jspui/handle/123456789/1542.

Ladefoged, Peter and Ian Maddieson. 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford: Basil Blackwell.

Ladefoged, Peter. 1994. The Links Between Theory and Fieldwork in Phonetics. University of California Working Papers in Phonetics, v. 88: 13-28.

Lama, Ziwo Qiu-Fuyuan. 2012. Subgrouping Of Nisoic (Yi) Languages: A Study From The Perspectives Of Shared Innovation And Phylogenetic Estimation. Ph.D. dissertation, University of Texas at Arlington.

Langendoen, D. Terrence. 1967. “Mundari Verb Conjugation.” In: Linguistics 32:39-57

Langendoen, D. Terrence. 1967. “The Copula in Mundari.” In: The Verb BE and its synonyms. Dordrecht: Riedel. (Supplement I to Foundations of Language). 75-100

Laohasirinadh, Pornpan (พรพรรณ เลาหศิรินาถ). 1976. “Relations between Mon state, Burma, and Sukhodaya in the 13th-14th centuries A.D. / ความสัมพันธ์ของมอญ พม่า และสุโขทัย ระหว่างพุทธศตวรรษที่ 19-20.” Silpakorn University.

La-or, Sajjaphoum (สัจภูมิ ละออ). 2006. “A literary analysis of the Sdok Kok Thom inscription / การวิเคราะห์ศิลาจารึกสดกก็อกธมเชิงวรรณกรรม.” Silpakorn University.

LaPolla, Randy. 2014. Sino-Tibetan Syntax . In William S-Y. Wang and Chaofen Sun (eds.) The Oxford Handbook of Chinese Linguistics. Online publication May 2015 DOI: 10.1093/oxfordhb/9780199856336.013.0044

Larish, Michael D. 1999. The Position of Moken and Moklen in the Austronesian Language Family. PhD dissertation, University of Hawai‘i at Mānoa 

Larish, Michael. 2005. Moken and Moklen. In Alexander Adelaar and Nikolaus P. Himmelmann (eds.), The Austronesian languages of Asia and Madagascar. London: Routledge. pp. 513-533.

Lavallee, Alfred. 1901. Notes ethnographique sur diverses tribus du Sud-Est de l'lndo-Chine. Bulletin de I'Ecole Française d'Extreme-Orient. Paris. 1 (4):291-311.

Lavallee, Alfred. n.d. Vocabulaire comparé  des dialectes savages du Bas-Laos: boloven, niaheun, alak, lăvé, kaseng, halang (ou selang), bahnar, sedang, djarai, Ecole française d'Extrême-Orient, ms.

Law, B. C. 1939. “ANCIENT INDIAN TRIBES.” Annals of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute 21 (3/4): 203–12.

Law, Bimala Churn. 1935. “COUNTRIES AND PEOPLES OF INDIA (Epic and Pauranic Sources).” Annals of the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute 17 (3): 217–42. 

Law, Bimala Churn. 1939-1940. Bhiksunis in Indian Inscriptions. Epigraphica Indica 25:31-34 [B1] 

Lê, Đình Khẩn. 2002. Từ vựng gốc Hán trong Tiếng Việt (Words of Chinese Origin in Vietnamese). Ho Chi Minh City: Nhà Xuất Bản, Đại Học Quốc Gia Hồ Chí Minh. 

Lebar, Frank M., Gerald C. Hickey, and John K. Musgrave. 1964. Ethnic groups of mainland Southeast Asia. New Haven, Conneticut: Human Relations Area Files Press.

Leclère, Adhémar. 1900. Vocabulaire français-sâauch-cambodgien. Manuscrit de l’Ecole Française d’Extrême-Orient, Paris. 65p. [identified by the spelling sâauch only used by Leclère, see Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Indochinoises 57, 1910

Leclère, Adhémar. 1910. Les Sâauch. Bulletin de la Société des Etudes Indochinoises 57: 91-114. La langue des Sâauch, 112-114.

Lee, Alan. 2005. Personal communication (email dated 12 February 2005).

Lee, E.W. 1966. Proto-Chamic Phonologic Word and Vocabulary. Ph.D. dissertation, Indiana University.

Lee, E.W. 1974. Southeast Asian Areal Features in Austronesian Strata of the Chamic Languages. Oceanic Linguistics 13: 643-682.

Lee, E.W. 1977. Devoicing, Aspiriation and Vowel Split in Haroi: Evidence for Register (Contrastive Tongue-Root Position). In D. Thomas et al. (eds.) (1977), pp 87-104.

LEE, Thomas. 1983. An acoustical study of the register distinction in Mon. UCLA Working Papers in Phonetics. 57 [April]. 79-96.

Leenhardt, Maurice, 1930. Notes d'Ethnologie Néo- Calédonienne. Travaux et Mémoires de l'Institut d'Ethnologie (8). Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie.

Leenhardt, Maurice, 1946. Langues et Dialectes de l'Austromélanésie. Paris: Institut d'Ethnologie.

Lefebvre, Emmanuel. 2000. Summary: Minorities, North-east Cambodia. Unpublished manuscript. 

Lefèvre-Pontalis, Pierre. 1892. Nores sur quelques populations du nord de l'Indochine. Journal Asiatique 8.19:237-69.

Lefèvre-Pontalis, Pierre. 1896. Nores sur quelques populations du nord de l'Indochine (2e série). Journal Asiatique 9.8:129-303.

Lehmann, Winfred P.1993. Theoretical Bases of Indo-European Linguistics. London, Routledge.

Leitch, Myles. 1981. A Study of Rengao in Proto-North Bahnaric. ms. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Leumkhan, Saifon (สายฝน เหลื่อมคั้น). 1991. “Description of the Chong language, Namkhun 1 village, Khlongphu subdistrict, Makham district, Chanthaburi province / ภาษาชอง หมู่บ้านน้ำขุ่น 1 ตำบลคลองพลู อำเภอมะขาม จังหวัดจันทบุรี.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56221&language=thai.

Levin, J. 1985. A Metrical Theory of Syllabicity. Cambridge, Mass.: Ph.D. dissertation, MIT.

Lévy, Paul. 1943. Récherches préhistoriques dans la region de Mlu Prei (accompagnées de comparaisons archéologiques et suivies d’un vocabulaire Français-Kuy). Hanoi: Publications de l’Ecole Française d’Extrême-Orient. 

Lévy, S. Pré-Aryen et pré-Dravidien dans l’Inde. Journal Asiatique 203, 1923, 1–57.

Lewis, M. Blanche. 1960. Moken texts and word-list: a provisional interpretation. Kuala Lumpur: Museums Department, Federation of Malaya.

Lewis, Emily Dawn. 2008. Grammatical Studies of Man Noi Plang. MA thesis, Payap University, Thailand.

Lewitz, Saveros. 1967. Recherches sur le vocabulaire cambodgien. (I) Mots khmers considérés à tort comme d'origine savante", Journal Asiatique, 1: 117-31.

Lewitz, Saveros. 1974. Recherches sur le vocabulaire Cambodgien, Journal Asiatique, 162: 151-170.

LEYDEN, J. 1808. on the languages and literature of the Indo-Chinese nations. IX. The Mon language. Asiatick Researches 10.239-240. [repr. In Moscellaneous papers relating to Indo-China. London, Trübner, 1886, Vol. 1, pp. 138-139.].

Li Dao Yong, Nie Xi Zhen and Qiu E Feng. 1986. Bùlàngyu ǰiánzhì. Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, Beijing. (A description of Bulang (Lamet)). 

Lǐ Dàoyǒng & Yuán Bǐngchāng 袁丙昌. 1983. ‘Kammufolkets musikinstrument’ [Musical instruments of the Kammu] [Annotated translation of Yuán & Lǐ 1981 by Kazuyo Suzumura-Lundström and Håkan Lundström] (with an appendix: ‘Motsvarande musikinstrument hos Yùankammuerna’ [The corresponding musical instruments among the Yùan Kammu] by Håkan Lundström and Damrong Tayanin). Orientaliska studier 43/44, 58–66.

Lǐ Dàoyǒng 李道勇, Kristina Lindell, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1992. ‘Motifs in a Kammu story from Yunnan’. Thai-Yunnan project newsletter 16, 15–20. Canberra: Australian National University.

Li Fangkuei. 1977. A Handbook of Comparative Tai. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications. Honolulu, University Press of Hawaii.

Li Jinfang & Luo Yongxian. 2014. Bugan. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds). The Handbook of Austroasiatic Languages. Leiden: Brill.

Li Jinfang [李錦芳]. 1996. A sketch of Bugan [布干语概况]. Minzu Yuwen. 

Li Jinfang [李锦芳]. 2006. Studies on endangered languages in the Southwest China [西南地区濒危语言调查研究]. Beijing: Minzu University.

Li Jinfang. 1996. Bugan-a new Mon-Khmer language of Yunnan Province, China. Mon-Khmer Studies 26:135-160.

Li Jinfang. 1996. Bugan-a new Mon-Khmer language of Yunnan Province, China. Mon-Khmer Studies 26:135-160.

Li Xulian [李旭练]. 1999. A Study of Lai (Bolyu) [倈语硏究]. Beijing: Minzu University Press [中央民族大学出版社].

Li Yunbing [李云兵]. 2005. A study of Bugeng [Bugan] [布赓语研究]. Beijing: Ethnic Publishing House [民族出版社].

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1972. On comparative Tsou. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology 44: 311-338.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1973. Rukai structure. Taipei: Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica, Special Publications, No. 64.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1974. Alternations between semi-consonants and fricatives or liquids. Oceanic Linguistics, 13: 163-186. 

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1975a. Rukai texts. Taipei: Institute of History and Philology, Special Publications, No. 64.2. 

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1975b. Maga Phonology: A Preliminary Report. Bulletin of the Department of Archaeology and Anthropology, 37/38: 16-28. Taipei: National Taiwan University. 

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1977a. The Internal Relationships of Rukai. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, 48.1: 1-92. Taipei: Academia Sinica. 

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1977b. Morphophonemic Alternations in Formosa Languages. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, 48.3: 375-413. Taipei: Academia Sinica.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1995. Rukai. Comparative Austronesian Dictionary: An Introduction to Austronesian studies, ed. by Darrell, Tryen, 295-303. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyten.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1996. The pronominal systems in Rukai. In the Festschrift in honour of Professor Isidore Dyen. 209-230. Hamburg: Abera Publishing House.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1997a. Word list in The Formosan languages of Kaohsiung Hsien, ed. by Jen-Kuei Paul Li et al., 513-554. Kaohsiung: Kaohsiung Hsien Government.

Li, Paul Jen-Kuei. 1997b. Formosa Folkways. Taipei: Chang-Ming Publisher. 

Li, Rong (李榮). 1998. 南寧平話辭典 (A dictionary of Nanning Pinghua Chinese). Nanjing, China: 江蘇教育出版社. 

Liang Min [梁敏]. 1984. A sketch of Bolyu [俫语概况]. Minzu Yuwen 1984:4.

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1985. Possessive constructions in Oceanic languages and in Proto- Oceanic, in Andrew Pawley and Lois Carrington (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the 15th Pacific Science Congress. Pacific Linguistics (C- 88), 93- 140. Canberra: Australian National University.

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1986. Syntactic-category change in Oceanic languages. Oceanic Linguistics 24:1-84.

Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1988. The Cristobal- Malaitan subgroup of southeast Solomonic. Oceanic Linguistics (27), 24- 62.

Lincoln, Pete, 1977. Listing Austronesian languages. Part 1: Oceanic languages. Typescript.

Lindell, Kirsten, Tayanin Damrong, Thongphet Kingsada & Soumsang Sainyawong. 1994. Khamu-Lao Dictionary. Vientiane, Ministry of Information and Culture.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 1974. ‘A Lampang field report: Kammu language and folklore’. Annual Newsletter of the SIAS [Scandinavian Institute of Asian studies, Copenhagen] 8, 14–24.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 1976a. ‘Kammu language and folklore’. In Søren Egerod & Per Sørensen (eds.), Lampang reports, 244–53. Copenhagen: Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 1976b. Phap aan Kammu: lem thii 1 | Kammu reader: vol. 1. Lund.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 1977. ‘The Kammu dishes’. In Jessica Kuper (ed.), The anthropologists’ cookbook, 171–74. London: Kegan Paul.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 1978. ‘Kammu hunting rites’. Journal of Indian folkloristics 1:2, 53–62.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 2001. ‘Höstmat hos kammuerna’ [Autumn food among the Kammu]. Gastronomisk kalender 40, 37–46.

Lindell, Kristina & Damrong Tayanin. 2004. ‘Konsten att jäsa (och dricka) krukvin’ [The art of fermenting (and drinking) wine in jars]. Gastronomisk kalender 43, 131–37.

Lindell, Kristina & Jan-Öjvind Swahn. 1997. Collecting narrative folklore in Southeast Asia: a handbook for people who want to help preserving their national heritage. Lund.

Lindell, Kristina, Håkan Lundström, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 1983. ‘The Kammu village – a Southeast Asian minority society: a project at Lund University, Sweden’. Annual newsletter of the Scandinavian Institute of Asian Studies 17, 22–34.

Lindell, Kristina, Håkan Lundström, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 1982. The Kammu year: its lore and music. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1976. ‘The flood: three Northern Kammu versions of the story of the creation’. Acta Orientalia 37, 183–200. Republished 1988 in Alan Dundes (ed.), The flood myth, 265–80. Berkeley: University of California Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1977. A Kammu story-listener’s tales. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1980. Folk tales from Kammu II: a story-teller’s tales. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1984. Folk tales from Kammu III: pearls of Kammu literature. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1989. Folk tales from Kammu–IV: a master-teller’s tales. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1995. Folk tales from Kammu V: a young story-teller’s tales. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn & Damrong Tayanin. 1998. Folk tales from Kammu–VI: a teller’s last tales. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Öjvind Swahn, Lǐ Dàoyǒng 李道勇 & Damrong Tayanin. 1993. Working on the motifs in a folk tale: with a Kammu story from Yunnan as an example text. Lund.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Olaf Svantesson and Damrong Tayanin. 1978. Two dialects of the Romeet (Lamet) language. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Oriental 4:5-22.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Olaf Svantesson and Damrong Tayanin. 1979. Phonology of the Kammu dialects. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Oriental 9:45-71.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Olof Svantesson and Damrong Tayanin. 1981. Phonology of Kammu dialects. Cahiers de Linguistique, Asie Orientale, 7.1:59-67.

Lindell, Kristina, Jan-Olof Svantesson & Damrong Tayanin. 1982. The Kammu calendar and its lor’. In Lindell, Lundström, Svantesson & Tayanin (eds.) XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX pp. 19–59.

Lindell, Kristina, Rolf Samuelsson & Damrong Tayanin. 1979. ‘Kinship and marriage in Northern Kammu villages: the kinship model’. Sociologus 29, 60–84.

Lindell, Kristina. 1974. A Vocabulary of the Yuan Dialect of the Kammu language. Acta Orientalia. 36:191-207.

Lindell, Kristina. 1979. ‘Thailand: the Kammu language and folklore project’. Asian folklore studies 38:1, 107–11.

Lindell, Kristina. 1982. ‘The Kammu people’. In Lindell, Lundström, Svantesson & Tayanin 1982, 1–18.

Lindell, Kristina. 1984. ‘Kammu totem tales’. Asian folklore studies 43, 3–13.

Lindell, Kristina. 1985. ‘Elefanten och myrorna’ [The elephant and the ants]; ‘Sädesärlan och himmelens ande’ [The wagtail and the spirit of the sky]. In Stina Lindell & Ebbe Lindell, Barn i Asien, 74–76. Stockholm: Liber Läromedel.

Lindell, Kristina. 1987. ‘Call for a motif-index of Southeast Asian folk literature’. Nordic Institute of Folklore newsletter 15:4, 12–14.

Lindell, Kristina. 1988. ‘Rhyme-pivot sayings in northern Kammu’. In Leif Littrup (ed.), Analecta Hafniensia: 25 years of East Asian studies in Copenhagen, 88–99. London: Curzon Press.

Lindell, Kristina. 1998. ‘A short history of the research project “The heritage of the Kammu (Laos): the culture, language and experience of an indigenous people”’. In Heissig & Schott 1998, 207–15.

Lindell, Kristina. 2005a. ‘Fältstationen i Lampang och början på projektet’ [The field station in Lampang and the beginning of the project]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 23–32.

Lindell, Kristina. 2005b. ‘Den skriftlöse och samhället’ [The illiterate and society]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 33–39.

Lindell, Kristina. 2005c. ‘Himmelens andar’ [The spirits of the sky]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 40–48.

Lindell, Kristina. 2005d. ‘Vad kan man lära om främmande folk utifrån deras sagor?’ [What can we learn about foreign peoples from their tales?]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 49–58.

Lindell, Kristina.1983. ‘Döden i kammuernas land’ [Death in Kammu land]. Orientaliska studier 43/44, 12–18.

Lindell, Kristina.1992. ‘The Kammu: a Southeast Asian minority’. Kompendium för kursen: icke statsbildande minoriteter i gränsområdet mellan Kina- och Sydöstasien. Lund: Institutionen för öst- och sydöstasiatiska språk, Lunds universitet.

Lindell, Kristina.1995. ‘Attempts to preserve the folklore of Southeast Asia’. Nordic Institute of Folklore newsletter 23:3, 11–14.

Lipson, Mark, Olivia Cheronet, Swapan Mallick, Nadin Rohland, Marc Oxenham, Michael Pietrusewsky, Thomas Oliver Pryce, Anna Willis, Hirofumi Matsumura, Hallie Buckley, Kate Domett, Nguyen Giang Hai, Trinh Hoang Hiep, Aung Aung Kyaw, Tin Tin Win, Baptiste Pradier, Nasreen Broomandkhoshbacht, Francesca Candilio, Piya Changmai, Daniel Fernandes, Matthew Ferry, Beatriz Gamarra, Eadaoin Harney, Jatupol Kampuansai, Wibhu Kutanan, Megan Michel, Mario Novak, Jonas Oppenheimer, Kendra Sirak, Kristin Stewardson, Zhao Zhang, Pavel Flegontov, Ron Pinhasi, David Reich.2018. Ancient Genomes Document Multiple Waves of Migration in Southeast Asian Prehistory, Science 361.6397:92-95.

Liu Yan. 1998. The Tonegenesis of Mon-Khmer Languages, Journal of Central University for Nationalities, Volume4. Beijing.

Liu Yan. 2002. The disyllable nouns in the Guangka subdialect of De’ang Language, Minority Languages of China, Volume2. Beijing.

Liu Yan and Bo Yang. 2006. Acoustic Analysis of the tones in the Guangka subdialect of De’ang, Minority Languages of China, Volume2. Beijing.

Logan, James Richardson. 1850. On the Leading Charactersitics of the Papuan, Australian, and Malayu-Polynesian Nations. The Journal of the Indian Archipelago. Vol. Vol IV: 344-478.

Logan, James Richardson. 1854. Ethnology of the Indo-Pacific Islands. Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia 8:28-200.

Logan, James Richardson. 1856. Ethnology of the Indo-Pacific islands, Part 2, Chapter 6, Appendix A: Comparative Vocabulary of the numerals of the Mon-Anam formation. Appendix B: Comparative vocabulary of miscellaneous words of the Mon-Anam formation. Journal of the Indian Archipelago, 1.

Logan, James Richardson. 1859a. The affiliation of the Tibeto-Burman, Mon-Anam, Papuanesian and Malayo-Polynesian pronouns and definitives, as varieties of the ancient Himilayo-Polynesian system; and the relation of that system to the Dravido-Australian. Journal of the Indian Archipelago, 3.1:65-98.

Logan, James Richardson. 1859b. The Mon-Anam formation. Journal of the Indian Archipelago, 3.1:153-183.

Long Seam. 2000. Dictionnaire du khmer ancien (d’après les inscriptions du Cambodge du VIe – VIIIe Siècles). Phnom Penh: Toyota Foundation.

Low, James. 1837. History of Tenasserim, IX: Languages. JRAS 4.42-47. [first mention ever of Mon register]

Luce, Gordon H. & BA SHIN. 1961. Pagan Myinkaba Kubyaukgyi temple of Râjakumâr (1113 AD) and the Old Mon writings on its walls. Bulletin of the Burma Historical Commission 2. 277-416. [OM ink glosses; published in 1965.]

Luce, Gordon H. (no date). Vocabulaire Riang. ms. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Luce, Gordon H. 1920. A Cambodian (?) Invasion of Lower Burma -- A Comparison of Burmese and Talaing Chronicales. Journal of the Burma Research Society 12:39-45.

Luce, Gordon H. 1920. The Shwegugyi Pagoda Inscription. Journal of the Burma Research Society 1.2.

Luce, Gordon H. 1925. Chinese Invasions of Burma in the 18th Century. Journal of the Burma Research Society 15.2:115-128.

Luce, Gordon H. 1936. Prayers in Ancient Burma. Journal of the Burma Research Society 26.3.

Luce, Gordon H. 1937. The Ancient Pyu. Journal of the Burma Research Society 27:239-253.

Luce, Gordon H. 1940. Economic Life of the Early Burman. Journal of the Burma Research Society 30:283-335.

Luce, Gordon H. 1940. The Bodhi trees of the Budhas. Journal of the Burma Research Society 30. 315-318. 

Luce, Gordon H. 1948. A Century of Progress in Burmese History and Archaeology. Journal of the Burma Research Society 32.1:79-94.

Luce, Gordon H. 1950. Mons of the Pagan dynasty.  Journal of the Burma Research Society XLII,i:1-19.

Luce, Gordon H. 1953. Mons of the Pagan Dynasty. Journal of the Burma Research Society 36.1:1-19.

Luce, Gordon H. 1956. The 550 Jatakas in old Burma. Artibus Asiae. 19.3-4:291-307. [contains OM word list]

Luce, Gordon H. 1958. The Early Syam in Burma's History. Journal of the Siam Society 46:123-214.

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. Geography of Burma Under the Pagan Dynasty. Journal of the Burma Research Society 52.1:32-74.

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. Notes on the Peoples of Burma in the 12th-13th Century A.D. Journal of the Burma Research Society 42:32-59.

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. Old Kyaukse and the Coming of the Burmans. Journal of the Burma Research Society 42.1:75-109.

Luce, Gordon H. 1959. The Early Syam in Burma's History: A Supplement. Journal of the Siam Society 47.1:59-101.

Luce, Gordon H. 1964. Comparative Lexicon (typeset with Corrections in Red and Green) English - Danaw - RiangSak - Rianglang.

Luce, Gordon H. 1965. Danaw, a dying Austroasiatic language. Lingua 14:98-129.

Luce, Gordon H. 1965. Dvâravatî and Old Burma. Journal of the Siam Society 53:10-26.

Luce, Gordon H. 1965. Rice and religion: A study of old Mon-Khmer evolution and culture. Journal of the Siam Society 53. 139-152. [includes 153 item word-list, comparative chart of OM orthography]

Luce, Gordon H. 1966. The Career of Htilaing Min (Kyanzittha). Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 1-1:53-68.

Luce, Gordon H. 1969. Old Burma-Early Pagan Volume 1. New York, J.J. Augustine Publisher / Lucust Valley, Artibus Asiae.

Luce, Gordon H. 1970. Aspects of Pagan History - Later Period. In Tej Bunnag & Michael Smithies (eds.) Memoriam Phya Anuman Rajadhon. Bangkok, Siam Society. pp.135-137.

Luce, Gordon H. 1973. Old Burma-Early Pagan Volume 4. Language Supplement: including golssary of Old Mon (of Burma), Glossary of pre-standard Old Burmese, Glossary of Sanskrit/Pali loanwords as found in Burma's inscriptions of the 11th and 12th Centuries A.D. Wason Collection, Olin Graduate Library Cornell University.

Luce, Gordon H. 1974. The Advent of Buddhism to Burma. In L. Cousins and A. Kunst (eds.) Buddhist Studies in Honour of Miss I. B. Horner. Dordrecht. pp.119137.

Luce, Gordon H. 1981. A Comparative Word List of Old Burmese, Chinese and Tibetan. London, SOAS.

Luce, Gordon H. 1985. Phases of Pre-Pagan Burma: Languages and Hisory. 2 vols. Oxford, Oxford Universsity Press.

Lundström, Håkan & Damrong Tayanin. 1978. ‘Kammu music in the Yuan area of northern Laos north of the Namta river’. Antropologiska studier 25/26, 62–67. [With vinyl record. Side 2 tracks 4a–b are Kammu]

Lundström, Håkan & Damrong Tayanin. 1981a. ‘Kammu gongs and drums (I): the kettlegong, gongs, and cymbals’. Asian folklore studies 40, 65–86.

Lundström, Håkan & Damrong Tayanin. 1981b. ‘Kammu gongs and drums (II): the long wooden drum and other drums’. Asian folklore studies 40, 173–89.

Lundström, Håkan & Damrong Tayanin. 1982. ‘Music in the fields’. In Lindell, Lundström, Svantesson & Tayanin 1982, 60–160.

Lundström, Håkan & Damrong Tayanin.1983. ‘Musik för rissjälen’ [Music for the rice-soul]. Orientaliska studier 43/44, 19–25.

Lundström, Håkan & Jan-Olof Svantesson. (eds.). 2005. Kammu: om ett folk i Laos (Lunds universitetshistoriska sällskaps årsbok 2006). Lund: Lunds universitetshistoriska sällskap.

Lundström, Håkan & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 1996. ‘Features of Kammu music terminology: a musico-linguistic study’. Pan-Asiatic linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics 4, 1528–34. Salaya: Mahidol University [With DVD record].

Lundström, Håkan & Jan-Olof Svantesson. 2008. ‘Hŕlɨ̀ɨ singing and word-tones in Kammu’. Working papers (Dept. of Linguistics and Phonetics, Lund University) 53, 117–31.

Lundström, Håkan & Kam Raw [Damrong] Tayanin. 2006. Kammu songs: the songs of Kam Raw. Copenhagen: NIAS Press.

Lundström, Håkan. 1983. ‘Två kammusånger’ [Two Kammu songs]. Orientaliska studier 43/44, 49–57.

Lundström, Håkan. 1984. ‘A Kammu song and its structure’. Asian folklore studies 43:1, 29–39.

Lundström, Håkan. 1991. ‘Att arbeta med en informant utanför dennes hemkultur’ [Working with an informant outside of his cultural context]. Musikologen 1991, 35–37. Uppsala: Institutionen för musikvetenskap, Uppsala universitet.

Lundström, Håkan. 1994. ‘Musical change of the Kammu in Laos’. In Lauritzson, Gun (ed.), Cooperation East and West – continued 148–55. Lund: Lund University.

Lundström, Håkan. 2002. ‘Kammu vocal genres and performance’. Mon–Khmer studies 32, 131–43.

Lundström, Håkan. 2005. ‘En upptäcktsresa i musik och metod’ [An expedition in music and method]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 113–30.

Lundström, Håkan. 2009a. ‘An ethnomusicology perspective on music learning’. In Yu Danhong (ed.), National conference on music education, Beijing 2009, 1–7. [In English and Chinese]

Lundström, Håkan. 2009b. ‘Music learning and musical diversity’. APSMER 2009, 7th Asia–Pacific symposium on music education research (ISME Asia–Pacific regional conference), 1–8. Shanghai: Baijia Publishing House 百家出版社.

Lundström, Håkan. 2009c. Music from villages in Vietnam 2 [CD booklet]. Hanoi: Vietnamese Institute of Musicology 2009. [CD record, Track 10, p. 17 and track 18, pp, 23–24 are Kammu]

Lundström, Håkan. 2010. I will send my song: Kammu vocal genres in the singing of Kam Raw. Copenhagen: NIAS Press [With CD record].

Lundström, Håkan. 2012a. ‘Memories as re-created cultural practice – a foreword to the second edition’. In Tayanin & Lindell 2012, ix–xii.

Lundström, Håkan. 2012b. ‘Music education from a slightly different perspective’. In Gary E. McPherson & Graham F. Welch (eds.), The Oxford handbook of music education, Part 7: Critical reflections and future action, 651–56. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Lundström, Håkan. 2013. ‘Beautifying techniques in Kammu vocal genres’. In Jeffrey P. Williams (ed.), The aesthetics of grammar: sound and meaning in the languages of Mainland Southeast Asia, 118–32. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Lustig, Eileen, Damian Evans and Ngaire Richards. 2007. Words across Space and Time: An Analysis of Lexical Items in Khmer Inscriptions, Sixth–Fourteenth Centuries CE. Journal of Southeast Asian Studies 38:1:1-26

Luther, Doktor Martin. 1949 (translation). d.akt.ar mart.in luthara? konon kat.ekhism moloy tanaej snana? kayom od.o? mo~eny ubar senel (binti). Ranchi

Lynch, John (ed.), 1983. Studies in the Languages of Erromanga. Pacific Linguistics (C- 79). Canberra: Australian National University.

Lynch, John and D.T. Tryon, 1985. Central- Eastern Oceanic: a subgrouping hypothesis, in Pawley, Andrew and Lois Carrington (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the 15th Pacific Science Congress. Pacific Linguistics (C- 88), 31- 52. Canberra: Australian National University.

Lynch, John, 1978. Proto- south Hebridean and Proto- Oceanic, in Wurm, S.A. & Lois Carrington (eds), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, Fascicle 2. Pacific Linguistics (C- 61), 717- 779. Canberra: Australian National University.

Lyngdoh, A. in preparation. Complementation in Khasi. M.Phil. dissertation.

Lyngdoh, Badakerlin. 2012. Some aspects of maram dialect of west Khasi hills. PhD thesis, North Eastern Hill Universality, Shillong.

Macey, Paul. 1906. Etude ethnographique sur diverses tribus, aborigènes ou autochtones, habitant les provinces de Hua-phans, Ha-tang-hoc et du Cammon, au Laos. In Actes du XIVe Congres International des Orientalistes: 1e Tome, 5e Section, 3-63. Paris: Ernest Leroux.

Macey, Paul. 1907a. Etudes ethnographique sur les khas. Revue Indochinoise:869-74.

Macey, Paul. 1907b. Etude ethnographique et linguistique sur les K'Katiam-Pong-Houk, dits: Thai Pong (Province du Cammon-Laos). Revue Indochinoise 5: 1411-24.

Macphail, R.M. 1954. Campbell’s English-Santali Dictionary. 3rd ed. Benegaria: Santal Mission Press.

Macphail, R.M.. 1964. An introduction to Santali. Calcutta: Firma KLM Private Limited.

Maddieson, Ian. 2005. Voicing and gaps in plosive systems (map 5). In Martin Haspelmath, Matthew S. Dryer, David Gil, and Bernard Comrie, eds., The World Atlas of Language Structures: 26-29. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Mahapatra, B. and D. Matson. 1962. “Brief Description of Juang.” Unpublished Manuscript, Puri

Mahapatra, B. P. 1976. Comparative Notes On Juang and Kharia Finite Verbs. In Philip Jenner, Laurence Thompson, Stanley Starosta (eds) Austroasiatic Studies, edited by Philip N. Jenner et al. Honolulu, 801-814. The University Press of Hawaii. 

Mahapatra, B.P. 1962. “A Note on Juang Morphology” Unpublished Mimeo

Mahapatra, B.P. 1962. “A Note on Juang Phonology”. Unpublished Mimeo

Mahapatra, B.P. 1963. “Revised Munda lexical items list: Juang.” Mimeo

Mahapatra, B.P. 1964. “A Note on Sora Verb Morphology” Unpublished Mimeo, Puri

Mahapatra, B.P. 1976. “Comparative Notes on Juang and Kharia Finite Verbs.” In: Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 801-14 

Mahapatra, Bijoy & Ranganayaki Mahapatra. 1967. Computer Printout of Sora Vocabulary. (no further data available)

Mahapatra, K. & N.H. Zide. 1972. Gta? Nominal Combining forms. Indian Linguistics 33. 179-202

Mahapatra, K. 1973. Gta? Demonstratives (abstract only). Proceedings of the IV All India Converence of Linguistics.

Mahapatra, K. 1976. “Echo-Formation in Gta?.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 815-33 

Mahapatra, K. 1978. “Didayi demonstratives.” Presented at the Second International Congress of Austroasiatic Linguistics, 1978, Mysore

Mahapatra, K. 1980. “Gta? demonstrative system.” Presented at the 2nd International South Asian Linguists Conference, Hyderabad, India

Mahapatra, K. and Norman H. Zide. no date. “Gta? Texts.” Unpublished Manuscript

Mahapatra, K. no date. “A Dictionary of Didayi Language.” Manuscript

Mahapatra, K. no date. “Gta? Texts.” Manuscript

Mahapatra, Khageshwar. (with Dobek Pujari and P.K. Panda). 1989. Didayi. (In Oriya) Bhubaneshwar: Academy of Tribal Dialects and Culture, Government of Orissa

Mahapatra, Khageswar. n.d. Gta' Word List. Unpublished manuscript. 

Mahdi, Waruno 1999. The dispersal of Austronesian boat forms in the Indian Ocean. In: Roger Blench & Matthew Spriggs (eds.), Archaeology and Language III. 144-79. London: Routledge.

Mai, Seng. 2012. “A Descriptive Grammar of Wa.” Payap University.

Maier & Burton. 1981. Cua-English-Vietnamese Dictionary: 1981 pre-publication manuscript based on a 1966 manuscript. (Held by SIL, Dallas)

Maier, Jacqueline & Đinh van Cau. 1976. Cua Vocabulary: Cua-Vietnamese-English Thesaurus (a computer print-out). Huntington Beach California, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Maier, Jacqueline & E. Burton. 1971. Vietnam Word List (revised): Cua. Copy held by Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok (folder 495.9).

Maier, Jacqueline. 1964. English - Takua Vocabulary. Copy held by Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok, Takua folder 495.969.

Maier, Jacqueline. 1969. Cua phonemes, Mon-Khmer Studies 3:9-19

Maitreejit, Phramaha Kittisak (พระมหากิตติศักดิ์ ไมตรีจิตร). 1999. “Computer-assisted instruction of Khmer-Thai script / บทเรียนคอมพิวเตอร์ช่วยสอนเรื่องอักษรขอมไทย.” Silpakorn University.

Majhi, L. 1990. Santal: byakarasa, racanakali, sabdakosa [Santali(-Oriya) dictionary] Bhubaneshwar: Adibasi Bhasha o Samskriti Ekademi

Majumdar, D.N. 1924. On the terminology of relationship of the Hos of Kolhan. Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal, N.S., 20/5. 199-204

Majumder, Partha P. 2010. “The Human Genetic History of South Asia.” Current Biology 20 (4): R184–87. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.cub.2009.11.053.

Majumder, Partha P., and Analabha Basu. 2015. “A Genomic View of the Peopling and Population Structure of India.” Cold Spring Harbor Perspectives in Biology 7 (4): a008540. https://doi.org/10.1101/cshperspect.a008540.

Mak, Pandora. 2012. Golder Palaung: A grammatical description. Canberra, Asian Pacific Linguistics (A-PL 003 / SEAMLES 002)

Makboon, Sorat. 1981. Survey of Sea People’s dialects along the West Coast of Thailand, MA Thesis, Mahidol University, Nakhon Pathom: Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development.

Malapol, Mingkwan. 1989. Pray Grammar at Ban Pae Klang, Thung Chang District, Nan Province. MA thesis, Mahidol University, Thailand.

Malhotra, Veena. 1982. The Structure of Kharia: A Study of Linguistic Typology and Language Change. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Jawaharlal Nehru Univeristy, New Delhi

Malglaive, J. de (Joseph). 1902. Vocabulaire Hang-Tchek, Khas Xos, Harème (by M. Riviére). Voyages au centre de l'Annam et du Laos et dans les regions sauvages de l'est de l'Indo-Chine. 285-290.

Malone, Dennis L. 2001. Language development in a minority language community : Report of the Chong Writers Workshop. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 141-152.

Man, E.H. 1888/1889. A Dictionary of the Central Nicobarese Language. Reprint: Delhi: Sanskaran Prakashak, 1975

Man, E.H. 1933. The Nicobarese Islands and their People. London: Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland

Man, Edward Horace. 1889. Dictionary of the Central Nicobarese language (English-Nicobarese and Nicobarese-English), with appendices containing a comparison of synonymous words in the remaining Nicobarese forms and other matters, preceded by notes on the grammar of the Central form. London, W. H. Allen and Co. Reprinted in 1975 by Sanskaran Prakashak, Delhi. 

Manley, Timothy M. 1972. Outline of Sre Structure. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publication No.12. Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press.

Mann, Noel. 2004. Mainland Southeast Asia Comparative wordlist for lexicostatistic studies. Chiang Mai: Payap University Graduate School. 

Marantz, Alec. 1982. Re Reduplication. Linguistic Inquiry 13: 435-482.

Marck, Jeffrey C., 1975. The origins and dispersal of the Proto Nuclear Micronesians. MA Thesis: University of Iowa.

Markowski, Linda. 2005. “A Comparative Study of Kuy Varieties in Cambodia.” Payap University.

Marrison, Geoffrey E. 1975. The early Cham language. and its relationship to Malay. Journal of the Malaysian Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society 48.2:52–59.

Martin, Marie A. 1974a. Remarques générales sur les dialectes pear. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5(1): 25-37.

Martin, Marie A. 1974b. Esquisse phonologique du sɔmree. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien 5(1): 97-106.

Martin, Marie A. 1975. Le dialecte cambodgien parlé à Tatey, Massif des Cardamomes. Asie du Sudest et Monde Insulindien, 5.1:97-106.

Martin, Marie A. 1975. Les dialectes Pears dans leurs rapports avec les langues nationales. Journal of the Siam Society, 63.2:86-95.

Martin, Marie A. 1997. Les Khmers Daeum «Khmers de l'origine». Société montagnarde et exploitation de la forêt. De l'écologie à l'histoire. Paris: Presses de l'EFEO.

Martin, W. 1898. English-Santali Vocabulary. Benares: Medical Hall Press

Mason Library. 2002. http://www.keene.edu/library/orangasli/map1.cfm. (22 May 2005). Keene State College. 

Mason, Francis. 1854. The Talaeng Language. Journal of American Oriental Society.4: pp 277-288.

Mason, Francis. 1860. Burmah, its people and natural productions, or notes on the nations, fauna, flora, and minerals of Tenasserim, Pegu, and Burmah [. . .]. Rangoon, Ramney. [on Mon, pp. 129-134; first ed. 1852., ethnographic section omitted from 3rd ed.]

Maspéro, Henri. 1912. Etude sur la phonétique historique de la langue annamite: les initiales. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient 12.1-127.

Maspéro, Henri. 1915. Grammaire de la langue khmère (cambodgien). Paris, Imprimetie Nationale.

Maspero, Henri. 1929. “Langues”, in Georges Maspero (ed.), Un empire colonial francais. L’Indochine. (Ouvrage publié sous la direction de Georges Maspero), Paris, Bruxelles, Les éditions G. van Oest, Vol.1.

Maspéro, Henri. 1952a. L'annamite. In Meillet, A & M. Cohen (eds.) Les Langues du Monde, Paris: H. Champion, pp 581-587.

Maspéro, Henri. 1952b. Les langues Mon-Khmères. In Meillet & Cohen (eds.) (1952), pp 609-622.

Maspéro, Henri. 1955. Matériaux pour l'étude de la langue t'èng. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient, 47:457-507.

Mastana, S. S., B. Murry, M. P. Sachdeva, K. Das, D. Young, M. K. Das, and A. K. Kalla. 2007. “Genetic Variation of 13 STR Loci in the Four Endogamous Tribal Populations of Eastern India.” Forensic Science International 169 (2): 266–73. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.forsciint.2006.03.019.

Matisoff, James. 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. In Larry M. Hyman (ed.) Consonant Type and Tones: Southern California Occasional Papers in Linguistics. Los Angeles: University of California Los Angeles. pp. 71-95.

Matisoff, James. 1978. Variational Semantics in Tibeto-Burman: the 'organic' approach to linguistic comparison. Occasional Papers of the Wolfenden Society on Tibeto-Burman Linguistics, Volume VI. Publication of the Institute for the Study of Human Issues (ISHI), Philadelphia. xviii + 331 pp.

Matisoff, James. 1983. Linguistic diversity and language contact in Thailand. In McKinnon & Bhruksasri (eds.) (1983) pp 56-86.

Matisoff, James. 1991. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: Present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20:469-504.

Matisoff, James. 2003. Aslian: Mon-Khmer of the Malay Peninsula. Mon-Khmer Studies 33:1-58.

Matras, J., & Ferlus, M. 1971. Les langues austroasiatiques. Asie du Sud-Est et Monde Insulindien, 2.4:53-93. 

Matson, D.M. 1964. A Grammatical Sketch of Juang. Unpublished PhD-Dissertation, University of Wisconsin

MAUNG MYA. 1913. A further note on the word ‘Talaing’. JBRS 3.84-86.

MAY OUNG. 1912. Origin of the word ’Talaing’. JBRS 2. 73-74.

MAY OUNG. 1914. The derivation of Râmañña. JBRS 4. 148.

MAY OUNG. 1915. Some Mon place names. JBRS 7.143-145.

Mayrhofer, M. 1953-1980. Kurzgefasstes etymologisches Wörterbuch des Altindischen. Heidelberg, Winter.

McCarthy, John and Alan Prince. 1986. Prosodic morphology. Waltham, Mass.: Brandies University ms. Printed in Phonological Theory: The Essential Readings, ed. by John Goldsmith, 238-288. Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell.

McCarthy, John. 1979. Formal problems in Semitic phonology and morphology. Cambridge, Mass.: Ph.D. dissertation, MIT. Distributed by Indiana University Linguistics Club. Published by Garland Press, New York, 1985.

McCarthy, John. 1981. A prosodic theory of nonconcatenative morphology. Linguistic Inquiry 12: 373-418.

McCarthy, John. 1986. OCP Effects: Gemination and Antigemination. Linguistic Inquiry 17: 207-264.

McCarthy, John. 1994. The Phonetics and Phonology of Semantic Pharyngeals. Phonological Structure and Phonetic Form: Papers in Laboratory Phonetics 3, ed. P.A. Keating, 191-234. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

McColl, Hugh, Fernando Racimo, Lasse Vinner, Fabrice Demeter, Takashi Gakuhari, J. Víctor Moreno-Mayar, George van Driem, et al. 2018. “The Prehistoric Peopling of Southeast Asia.” Science 361 (6397): 88–92. https://doi.org/10.1126/science.aat3628.

McColl, Hugh, Hugh, Fernando Racimo, Lasse Vinner, Fabrice Demeter, Takashi Gakuhari, J. Víctor Moreno-Mayar, George van Driem, Uffe Gram Wilken, Andaine Seguin-Orlando, Constanza de la Fuente Castro, Sally Wasef, Rasmi Shoocongdej, Viengkeo Souksavatdy, Thongsa Sayavongkhamdy, Mohd Mokhtar Saidin1, Morten E. Allentoft, Takehiro Sato, Anna-Sapfo Malaspinas, Farhang A. Aghakhanian, Thorfinn Korneliussen, Ana Prohaska, Ashot Margaryan, Peter de Barros Damgaard, Supannee Kaewsutthi, Patcharee Lertrit, Thi Mai Huong Nguyen, Hsiao-chun Hung, Thi Minh Tran, Huu Nghia Truong, Giang Hai Nguyen, Shaiful Shahidan, Ketut Wiradnyana, Hiromi Matsumae, Nobuo Shigehara, Minoru Yoneda, Hajime Ishida, Tadayuki Masuyama, Yasuhiro Yamada, Atsushi Tajima, Hiroki Shibata, Atsushi Toyoda, Tsunehiko Hanihara, Shigeki Nakagome, Thibaut Deviese, Anne-Marie Bacon, Philippe Duringer, Jean-Luc Ponche, Laura Shackelford, Elise Patole-Edoumba, Anh Tuan Nguyen, Bérénice Bellina-Pryce, Jean-Christophe Galipaud, Rebecca Kinaston, Hallie Buckley, Christophe Pottier, Simon Rasmussen, Tom Higham, Robert A. Foley, Marta Mirazón Lahr, Ludovic Orlando, Martin Sikora, Maude E. Phipps, Hiroki Oota, Charles Higham, David M. Lambert, Eske Willerslev. 2018. The Prehistoric Peopling of Southeast Asia. Science 361:88–92.

McDougal, Ch. 1963. The Social Organization of the Hill Juang. Unpublished Ph.D. Dissertation of the University of New Mexico

McKinnon, John & Wanat Bhruksasri (eds.). 1983. Highlanders of Thailand. Kuala Lumpur, Oxford University Press.

Means, Natalie & Paul Means. 1987. Senoi-English, English-Senoi Dictionary. The Joint Centre on Modern East Asia, University of Toronto and York University. 

Means, Natalie. 1999. Temiar-English, English-Temiar Dictionary. Minnesota, Hamline University Press. 

Means, Nathalie & Paul B. Means. 1987. Senoi-English English-Senoi Dictionary. Toronto, Joint Centre on Modern East Asia.

Means, Paul. 1977. A comparative linguistic study of three Malayan aboriginal tribes. Malaysia Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society 50:48-68.

Meekrua-iam, Wasinee. 2002. “A Phonological and Lexicon Study in Food and Consumption of Vietnemese in Sukhaphiban Thabo District, Nongkhai Province =: การศึกษาระบบเสียงและคำศัพท์เกี่ยวกับอาหารและวัฒนธรรมการบริโภคของชาวเวียดนามเขตสุขาภิบาลอำเภอท่าบ่อ จังหวัดหนองคาย.” Mahidol University.

Meerwarth, A. M. 1919 (prepublished 1980). The Andamanese Nicobarese and Hill tribes of Assam. Gauhati: Spectrum Publications.

Mei, Tsu-Lin. 1970. Tones and prosody in Middle Chinese and the origin of the rising tone. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 30:86-110. 

Meillet, A & M. Cohen (eds.). 1952. Les Langues du Monde, Paris: H. Champion.

Meisterernst, Barbara. 2015 (online). Warring States to Medieval Chinese. In Encyclopedia of Chinese Language and Linguistics, General Editor Rint Sybesma. Accessed 16 December 2016. http://dx. doi. org/10. 1163/2210-7363_ecll_COM_00000445. 

Memanas, Payau. 1979. A description of Chaobon (ɲahkur): an Austroasiatic language in Thailand. MA thesis, Mahidol University.

Ménétrier E. 1926. Monographie de la Circonscription résidentielle de Kampot. Saigon: Editions d’Extrême-Orient. 89p. [vocabulaire saoch p. 41-42]

Metspalu, Mait, Irene Gallego Romero, Bayazit Yunusbayev, Gyaneshwer Chaubey, Chandana Basu Mallick, Georgi Hudjashov, Mari Nelis, et al. 2011. “Shared and Unique Components of Human Population Structure and Genome-Wide Signals of Positive Selection in South Asia.” The American Journal of Human Genetics 89 (6): 731–44. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajhg.2011.11.010.

Metspalu, Mait, Mayukh Mondal, and Gyaneshwer Chaubey. 2018. “The Genetic Makings of South Asia.” Current Opinion in Genetics & Development, Genetics of Human Origins, 53 (December): 128–33. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.gde.2018.09.003.

Michelena, Luis. 1995. The Ancient Basque Consonants (Translation by Larry Trask of 'Las antiguas consonantes vascas' published in Miscelanea homenaje a André Martinet, ed. by Diego Catalán, La Laguna, Tenerife, 1:113-157, 1957). In Hualde, Lakarra & Trask (eds.) 1995, pp 101-136.

Migliazza, Brian , A grammar of So - A Mon-Khmer language of northeast Thailand , 1998 , Linguistics, Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Mainland southeast Asia: a unique linguistic area , 1996 , Notes on Linguistics , Linguistics, Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Multilingualism among the So people of Issan , 2002 , Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Review of: East Asian linguistics, Shoichi Iwasaki and others, editors , 1997 , Notes on Linguistics , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Review of: Linguistic diversity and national unity: Language ecology in Thailand, by William Smalley , 1996 , Notes on Linguistics , Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Review of: Linguistic diversity and national unity: Language ecology in Thailand, by William Smalley , 1998 , Mon-Khmer Studies , Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , SEA language families , rev. ed. , 2006 , Sociolinguistics

Migliazza, Brian , So discourse connectives , 2000 , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , So procedural texts , 2001 , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , So stories: a preliminary analysis of texts in a Mon-Khmer language , 2003 , Mon-Khmer Studies , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Some expressives in So , 2005 , Ethnorêma , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , Stratified communication model of language , 1993 , Journal of Language and Linguistics, Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , The 24th International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics: Mon-Khmer section , 1992 , Notes on Linguistics , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian , The So people , 2002 , Literacy and Education

Migliazza, Brian L , A brief sketch of Fleming’s stratificational model , 1989 , Notes on Linguistics ,Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian L , Autonomous syntactic tiers , 1989 , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian L , Text analysis observations from Philemon using Fleming’s stratificational model , 1988 ,Notes on Translation , Linguistics

Migliazza, Brian Louis , Lexicostatistic analysis of some Katuic languages , 1992 , Language Assessment

Migliazza, Brian. 1992. Lexicostatistic Analysis of some Katuic Languages. Proceedings of the Third International Symposium on Language and Linguistics. Volume III. Bangkok, Thailand: Chulalongkorn University Printing House. pp. 1320-1325.

Migliazza, Brian. 1992. Lexicostatistical analysis of some Katuic languages. Paper presented at the 3rd International Symposium on Language and Linguistics: Pan-Asiatic linguistics. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University. 8–10 January.

Migliazza, Brian. 1996. Mainland Southeast Asia: a Unique Linguistic Area. Note on Linguistics, 17-25..

Migliazza, Brian. 1998. “A Grammar of So: A Mon-Khmer Language of Northeast Thailand = ไวยากรณ์ภาษาโส้: กะตุอิค ตระกูลมอญ-เขมร.” Mahidol University.

Migliazza, Brian. 1998. A grammar of So: a Mon-Khmer language of northeast Thailand. PhD thesis, Mahidol Univeristy.

Mikami, Naomitsu. 2003. A Khang Phonology and Wordlist. In Hiromi Ueda (ed.), Reports on Minority Languagesin Mainland Southeast Asia, 1-42. Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim, Faculty of Informatics, Osaka Gakuin University.

Milke, Wilhelm, 1965. Comparative Notes on the Austronesian Languages of New Guinea. Lingua 14: 330-348.

Milke, Wilhelm, 1968. Proto-Oceanic addenda. Oceanic Linguistics (7), 147-171.

Miller, C(arolyn?). nd. Southeast Asia Word List: Trieng. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics library Bangkok.

Miller, Carolyn and Nưan. 1974. Bru language lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No.13, part 2. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Miller, Carolyn. 1964. The substantive phrase in Brôu. Mon-Khmer Studies 1: 63-80.

Miller, John and Carolyn Miller. 1963. Brou-English-Vietnamese dictionary. Summer Institute of Linguistics. pp. 195 microfiche.

Miller, John and Carolyn Miller. 1996. Lexical comparison of Katuic Mon-Khmer languages with special focus on So-Bru groups in northeast Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies 26:255–290. 

Miller, John and Carolyn Miller. 2001. Selected Katuic diagnostic words. Unpublished manuscript.

Miller, John D. 1976. Bru Vocabulary. Summer Institute of Linguistics, Huntington Beach.

Miller, John. 1964. Word classes in Brôu. MIon-Khmer Studies 1: 41-62.

Miller, John. 1994. Evaluation of the wordlist used in a Mon-Khmer research project in Northeast Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies 23:67–81. 

Miller, Vera Grace. 1976. An overview of Stiêng grammar. (Summer Institute of Linguistics Workpapers Vol.20.) M.A. Thesis, University of North Dakota, Grand Forks. North Dakota.

Milne, Leslie. 1921. An Elementary Palaung Grammar. Oxford, Clarendon Press.

Milne, Leslie. 1931. A dictionary of English-Palaung and Palaung-English. Rangoon, Superintendent, Government Printing and Stationary.

Milner, G. B. & Eugénie J. A. Henderson (eds.). 1965. Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies (Lingua 14-15). Vol. 1: Historical Linguistics. Amsterdam, North Holland Publishing Co.

Minegishi, Makoto & Ganesh Murmu. 2001. Santali Basic Lexicon with Grammatical Notes. Tokyo: Institute for the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (Asian and African Lexicon Series No. 38). 

Minegishi, Makoto. 1990. “Santali-English-Japanese Wordlist - A Preliminary Report”. Journal of Asian and African Studies, 39. ILCAA, Tokyo.

Mingkwan Malapol. 1989. Pray grammar at Ban Pae Klang, Thung Chang district, Nan province. M.A. thesis, Mahidol University.

Misra, V. N. 2001. “Prehistoric Human Colonization of India.” Journal of Biosciences 26 (4): 491–531. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02704749.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1965. A descriptive and comparative study of Khamet phonology. Tônan Ajia Kentyû (South East Asian Studies), 3.3:22-51.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1966. Descriptive Study of the Lawa language (Bo Luang district). Tônan Ajia Kentyû (South East Asian Studies), 4.2: 40-62.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1972. A short vocabulary of Lawa. Tônan Ajia Kentyû (South East Asian Studies), 10.1: 131-68.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1972. Studies in the Lawa phonology. Tônan Ajia Kentyû (South East Asian Studies), 10.2: 174-96.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1977. Palaung dialects: a preliminary comparison. Tônan Ajia Kentyû (South East Asian Studies), 15.2: 193-212.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1978. Problems in the classification of Palaungic. Paper presented at the 2nd International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore, India.

Mitani, Yasuyuki. 1979. Vowel Correspondences between Riang and Palaung. Studies in Thai and Mon-Khmer Phonetics and Phonology in Honour of Eugénie J.A. Henderson. Chulalongkorn University Press, Bangkok, pp142-50.

Mitra, Aditya “sa~tAlI”. 1995. nyut Ar mArsAl (kAhnI puthI). rA~cI: janjAtIya bhAZA akAdamI

Mohanti, U.C. 1964. “Kharia.” Adibasi, 3:175-8

Mohanty, Prafulla Kumar.  004b. “GROWTH OF URBAN ECONOMY IN EARLY ORISSA.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 65: 104–10.

Mohanty, R.K., P.P. Joglekar, Tilok Thakuria, Sikhasree Ray, Shantanu Vaidya, Midhun C.S., Wannapat R., Varad Sabnis, Gauri Bedekar, Tosabanta Pradhan, Yogesh Mallinathpur M. 2012-13. Preliminary Report on Exploration at Golbai Sasan, Talapadaand the Surrounding Area, Dist. Khurda, Odisha, 2010-11. Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute 72/73:153-166 

Mohapatra, Sasmita. 1991. Juang [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Harijan & Tribal Welfare Department, Tribal Language Study Series, Vol. VII)

Mole, Robert L. 1970. The Montagnards of south Vietnam: a study of nine tribes. Rutland/Vermont/Tokyo, Charles E. Tuttle.

Molina, Jeanmaire, Martin Sikora, Nandita Garud, Jonathan M. Flowers, Samara Rubinstein, Andy Reynolds, Pu Huang, et al. 2011. “Molecular Evidence for a Single Evolutionary Origin of Domesticated Rice.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences 108 (20): 8351–56. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.1104686108.

Moore, Frank J. 1974. Thailand: its people, its society, its culture. New Haven, Human Relations Area Files Press.

Moorjani, Priya, Kumarasamy Thangaraj, Nick Patterson, Mark Lipson, Po-Ru Loh, Periyasamy Govindaraj, Bonnie Berger, David Reich, and Lalji Singh. 2013. “Genetic Evidence for Recent Population Mixture in India.” The American Journal of Human Genetics 93.3: 422–38. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.ajhg.2013.07.006.

Morizon, René. 1936. Essai sur le dialecte des populations Pears des Cardamomes. Paris, Les Éditions internationales.

Mortenson, David. 2006. “Tonally conditioned vowel raising in Shuijingping Hmong.” Handout from the LSA 80th Annual Meeting, Albuquerque, New Mexico. January 6, 2006. 

Mortenson, David. 2006. “Tonally conditioned vowel raising in Shuijingping Hmong.” Handout from the LSA 80th Annual Meeting, Albuquerque, New Mexico. January 6, 2006. 

Moura, J. 1883. Le royaume du Cambodge. Paris: Ernest Leroux, 2 vols. [porr and samreh vocabulary, vol. 1: 440-447] 

Moura, Jean. 1883. Le Royaume de Cambodge, 2 volumes. Paris, Ernest Leroux.

Moussay, Gérard (et al.). 1971. Dictionnaire ca&m-vietnamien-français. Phanrang, Centre Culturel Ca&m.

Mukherjee, C.L. 1962. The Santals. Calcutta: A. Mukherjee

Mukherjee, Mohua. 2000. The Birhor towards the next millennium: glimpses of a primitive tribal group at Kodarma in Bihar. With a foreword by Probodh K. Bhowmick. Calcutta: Sujan Publications

Mukhopadhyay, Chandidas. 1998. Kharia: the victim of social stigma. (No further data available)

Müller, Friedrich Wilhelm Karl. 1862. Lectures on the Science of Language: London: Longman, Green, Longman and Roberts. Third Edition.

Müller, Friedrich Wilhelm Karl. 1880. Grundriss der Sprachwissenschaft. Band II, II: Abtheilung: Die Sprachen der Malayschen und der Hochasiatischen (Mongolischen) Rasse, Wien, Alfred Höllder.

Müller, Friedrich Wilhelm Karl. 1954. Letter to Chevalier Bunsen on the classification of the Turanian Languages. In Bunsen's Christianity and Mandkind, Vol 3, p.175, London.

Munda, Ram Dayal. 1964. Mundari Quantifiers. University of Chicago. Unpublished.

Munda, Ram Dayal. 1968. Proto-Kherwarian Phonology. M.A. Thesis. Unpublished. University of Chicago

Munda, Ram Dayal. 1969. “Aspects of Mundari verb.” Indian Linguistics 30/2:27-49

Munda, Ram Dayal. 1976. “Some Formal Features of Traditional Mundari Poetry.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 843-871 

Munda, Ram Dayal. 1988. muNDArI-vyAkaraN. rAMcI: choTAnAgpur prakASan kendra.

Munda-Magyar-Maori: An Indian link between the antipodes; new tracks of Hungarian origins

Mundlay, Aasha K. 1965. “Multilingual Behaviour of the Nihals in some Settlements in Buldana District.” Unpublished MS, Chicago.

Mundlay, Aasha K. 1966. “Linguistic and Ritual Maintenance of Self-Identity among the Nihals.” Unpublished MS, Chicago.

Munn, Elizabeth. 2018. A Phonological Comparison of Eastern Lawa Varieties in Hot District, Chiang Mai Province, Thailand. MA Thesis, Payap University, Thailand.

Murdoch, John.B.1974. The 1901-1902 'Holy Man's' Rebellion. Journal of the Siam Society 62(1):47-65. 

Murmu, Ganesh. 1998. Bibliography of Santali Literature. Calcutta: Biswajnan

Murmu, R. 1976. Ranar: A Santali grammar in Santali. (Ol script work). Baripada

Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages, 45-78.

Nagaraja, K. S. 1985. Khasi, a descriptive analysis. Pune, Deccan College Post-Graduate and Research Institute.

Nagaraja, K. S. 1996. Khasi dialects, a typological consideration. Mon-Khmer Studies 23:1-10.

Nagaraja, K. S. 1996. The Status of Lyngngam. Mon-Khmer Studies 26:37-50.

Nagaraja, K. S. 2010. Austroasiatic Languages – an introduction. In K.S. Nagaraja & Kashyap Mankodi (eds.) Austro-Asiatic Linguistics: In memory of R. Elangaiyan, Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages. pp.1-32.

Nagaraja, K. S. 2011. Austroasiatic Languages – an introduction. In K.S. Nagaraja (ed.) Austro-Asiatic Linguistics: In memory of R. Elangaiyan, Mysore, CIIL (India). pp.1-32

Nagaraja, K.S. 1979. “Contraction of Khasi nouns in Compounds.” Indian Lingusitics 40:18-23

Nagaraja, K.S. 1984. “Compounding in Khasi.” Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute 43:79-90 (Pune)

Nagaraja, K.S. 1984. “Reduplication in Khasi.” Indo-Iranian Journal 27/3:189-200

Nagaraja, K.S. 1985. Khasi - A Descriptive Analysis. Pune: Deccan College, Post-Graduate and Research Institute.

Nagaraja, K.S. 1988. “Reduplication in Korku.” Working Papers in Linguistics, Deccan College 9:25-30

Nagaraja, K.S. 1989. Austroasiatic Languages. A Linguistic Bibliography. Pune: Deccan College, Post-Graduate & Research Institute

Nagaraja, K.S. 1989. Khasi Phonetic Reader. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Nagaraja, K.S. 1999. Korku Language. Grammar Texts, and Vocabulary. Tokyo: Institute for the Study of Language and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Nagaraja, K.S. 2004. “A Lexico-statistic study of Khynriam and Lyngngam Dialects of the Khasi Language.” The NEHU Journal 11.1:15-42.

Nagaraja, K.S. 2014. Standard Khasi. 2014.  Austroasiatic Comparative-Historical Reconstruction: an overview. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp.1145-1185.

Nagaraja, K.S. 2018. Bhoi Khasi Compared to Standard Khasi. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 11.2:i-xi. 

Nagaraja, K.S. no date. “Korku Phonology.” Pune. Bulletin of the Deccan College Research Institute 44:113-19.

Nai Pan Hla. 1988-89. An introduction to Mon language. Kyoto, Center for Southeast Asian Studies, Kyoto University. 

Nandan, Anshu Prash. 1993. The Nicobarese of Great Nicobar. New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House.

Nanda, Bikram Narayan. 1994. Contours of continuity and change: the story of the Bonda highlanders. New Delhi: Sage Publications

Narumol Charoenma. 1980. The sound systems of Lampang Lamet and Wiangpapao Lua. MA thesis, Mahidol University, Thailand.

Narumol Charoenma. 1982. The phonologies of a Lampang Lamet and Wiang Papao Lua. Mon-Khmer Studies 11.35-45.

National Institute of Statistics. 1999. 1998 Census priority tables (CD-ROM set). Phnom Penh: Ministry of Planning. 

Nattamon Rojanakul. 2009. Chong syntax. M.A. thesis, Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia, Mahidol University.

Nawalertpreecha, Sasitorn (ศศิธร นวเลิศปรีชา). 2009. “System of kinship terms in Suai (Kui-Kuai) spoken by different age groups in Sisaket province / ระบบคำเรียกญาติภาษาส่วย (กูย-กวย) ของผู้พูดที่มีอายุต่างกันในจังหวัดศรีสะเกษ.” Thesis, Chulalongkorn University. http://cuir.car.chula.ac.th/handle/123456789/20265.

Neiss, P. 1880. Rapport sur une excursion scientifique faite chez les Mois de l'arrondissement de Bahria; du 15 Mai au 15 Juin 1880. Excursions et Reconnaissances 16:405-435.

Neo, Paul and Marilyn Gregerson. 1974. Ro'ngao Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No. 19. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Neukom, Lukas. 2001. “Nomen/Verb-Distinktion im Santali.” Bernhard Wälchli & Fernando Zúniga (eds.). Sprachbeschreibung und Typologie. Publikation zum Workshop vom 16. Dezember 2000 in Bern. Bern: Institut für Sprachwissenschaft 

Neukom, Lukas. 2001. Santali. München: Lincom (Languages of the World/Materials, 323)

Neukom, Lukas. in press. “Argument Marking in Santali.” In: Mon-Khmer Studies,XXX. 

Nghia, Tran. 1976. “Some Characteristics of the Khmer-Mon Languages.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 1205-1213 

Nguyễn Đang Liêm. 1993. Tiếng Rục. Nhả xuất bản Khoa học Xã hội, Hanoi. 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1955. Quốc-ngữ: The modern writing system in Vietnam. Washington, D. C.: Author. 

Nguyễn, Ðình Hòa. 1957. Classifiers in Vietnamese. Word 13.1:124-152. 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1986. Alexandre de Rhodes' dictionary. Papers in Linguistics, 19, 1-18. 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1990. Graphemic borrowing from Chinese: The case of chữ nôm, Vietnam's demotic script. Bulletin of the Institute of History and Philology, Academia Sinica, 61, 383-432. 

Nguyễn, Ðình Hòa. 1991. Seventeenth-century Vietnamese lexicon: preliminary gleanings from Alexandre de Rhodes’ writings. In J. H. C. S. Davidson (ed.). Austroasiatic Languages: Essays in Honour of H. L. Shorto. ed. pp. 95-104. 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1995. NTC's Vietnamese-English dictionary (updated ed.). NTC language dictionaries. Lincolnwood, IL: NTC Pub. Press. ISBN 0-8442-8356-8; ISBN 0-8442-8357-6 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1996. Vietnamese. In P. T. Daniels, & W. Bright (Eds.), The world's writing systems, (pp. 691-699). New York: Oxford University Press. ISBN 0-19-507993-0. 

Nguyễn Đình-Hoà. 1997. Vietnamese: Tiếng Việt không son phấn. Amsterdam: John Benjamins Publishing Company. ISBN 1-55619-733-0. 

Nguyễn Hữu Hoành. 1995. Tiếng Katu cấu tạo từ [Katu Language word formation].  Hà Nội, Nhà xuất bản khoa học xã hội.

Nguyễn, Ngọc San. 2003. Tìm hiểu Tiếng Việt lích sử (Exploring the History of the Vietnamese Language). Ho Chi Minh City: Nhà Xuất Bản Đại Học Sư Phạm. 

Nguyên Phú Phong, Trần Trí Doi, Michel Ferlus. 1998. Lexique vietnamien-ruc-français. Paris, Sudestasie.

Nguyễn Tài Cẩn. 1995. Giáo trình lịch sử ngữ âm Tiếng Việt [A Text on Vietnamese Historical Phonology]. Hà Nội: Nhà Xuất Bản Giáo Dục.

Nguyễn Văn Lợi, Doàn Van Phúc, Phan Xuân Thàn. 1986. Sách hoc Tiêng Pakôh-Taôih. Hanoi, Tinh Bình tri Thiên.

Nguyễn, Văn Lợi. 1993. Tiếng Rục (The Rục language). Hà Nội: Nhà Xuất Bản Khoa Học Xã Hội. 

Nguyễn Văn Lợi, Nguyễn Hữu Hoành, Tạ Văn Thông. 2008. Tiếng Mảng. Hanoi, Nhả xuất bản Khoa học Xã hội. 

Nguyễn, Văn Khang, Bùi Chi, and Hoàng Văn Hành. 2002. Từ điển Mường-Việt (A Mường-Vietnamese dictionary). Hà Nội: Nhà Xuất Bản Văn Hoá Dân Tộc. 

Nichols, Johanna. 1996. The Comparative Method as Heuristic. in Durie & Ross (eds) (1996), pp 39-71.

Nissor Singh, U. 1900. Hints on the study of the Khasi language. Shillong: Ri Khasi Press

Nissor Singh, U. 1906. Khasi-English dictionary. Shillong: E. Bangal and Assam Secretariat Press.

Nissor Singh, U. 1920. English-Khasi Dictionary. Shillong, Assam Secretariat Press

Noppawan Thongkham. 2003. The phonology of Kasong at Khlong Saeng Village,Danchumphon sub-District, Bo Rai District, Trat Province, MA thesis, Mahidol University.

Norman, Jerry 1988. Chinese. Cambridge, Cambridge University Press.

Norman, Jerry and Tsu-lin Mei. 1976. The Austroasiatics in ancient south china: some lexical evidence. Monumenta Serica 32:274-301.

Norman, Jerry. 1984. “Three Min Etymologies.” Cahiers de Linguistique - Asie Orientale 13 (2): 175–89. https://doi.org/10.3406/clao.1984.1155.

Normile, D. 1997. Archaeology: Yangtze seen as earliest rice site. Science, 275, 309–310.

Nothofer, Bernd. 1975. The Reconstruction of Proto-Malayo-Javanic, Verhandelingen van het Koninklijk Instituut voor Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 73. 's-Gravenhage, Nijhoff.

Nothofer, Bernd. 1997. Dialek Melayu Bangka. Bangi: Penerbit Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Nottrott (Rev.) A. 1904. Grammatik der Kol-Sprache. Berlin [translated into English by Rev. Paul Wagner, Ranchi, 1967: Grammar of Kol language]

Nottrott (Rev.) A. 1905. Grammar of Kol Language, tr. by A.G.F. Fitzgerald into English with an appendix of phrases. Ranchi

Nottrott, A. 1871. A Mundari primer. Benaras.

Nottrott, A. 1882. Grammatik der Kohl-Sprache. Gütersloh (Translated in 1903 into English Osada, Toshiki. 1992. A Reference Grammar of Mundari. Tokyo, Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Nottrott, A. 1882. Grammatik der Kolh-Sprache. Guetersloh.

Nottrott, A. 1905. Kol Grammar.

Odden, D. 1987. “Arguments against the vowel plane in Gta?” Linguistic Inquiry 18/3:523-9

Ogawa, Naoyoshi and Erin Asai. 1935. The myths and traditions of the Formosan native tribes. Taihoku: Taihoku Teikoku Daigaku Geng-gaku kenkyu shitsu.

Ogilvie, Charles. 1949. Che Wông word lists and notes. Bulletin of the Raffles Museum Series B. 4:11-43.

O'Harrow S. 1979. From Co-Loa to the Trung sisters' revolt: Viet-Nam as the Chinese found it. Asian Perspectives 22(2):140-163.

Olivelle, Patrick (translator). 1999. The Dharmasutras: The Law Codes of Ancient India. Oxford: Oxford University Press (Oxford World's Classics) ISBN 978-0-19-283882-7

Olsen, Neil Hayes. 2014. A Descriptive Grammar of Kơho-Sre: a Mon-Khmer Language. PhD thesis, University of Utah.

Olsen, Neil Hayes. 2014. Kơho-Sre. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.). The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden and Boston, Brill. Pp. 746-788.

Olsson, Tord. 2005. ‘Religion som relationsbegrepp – samtal med Kàm Ràw’ [Religion as a relational concept – conversations with Kàm Ràw]. In Lundström & Svantesson 2005, 141–50.

O’Malley, L.S.S. 1910. Bengal district gazetteers: Santal Parganas. (Reprinted 2017 Gyan Publishing House)

Oostendorp, Colin J. Ewen, Elizabeth V. Hume, Keren Rice (eds.). 2011. The Blackwell Companion to Phonology. Wiley-Blackwell.

Orans, M. 1965. The Santal: A Tribe in Search of a Great Tradition. Detroit: Wayne State University Press

Oranuch Sa-ard. 1984. Phrases to sentences in Kuay (Surin). Mahidol University MA thesis. 

Osada, Toshiki. 1991. Father Ponette’s Field Note on Turi with a Comparative Vocabulary. Journal of Asian and African Studies, 42:175-89

Osada, Toshiki. 1991. Serial verb in Mundari. In: Annual Reports on CIIL-ILCAA Joint Research Project. 21-28

Osada, Toshiki. 1991. The demonstrative system in Mundari. Journal of Asian and African Studies, 42:59-70

Osada, Toshiki. 1992. A Reference Grammar of Mundari. Tokyo: Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa.

Osada, Toshiki. 1993. “Field Notes on Birhor.” In: Tsuyoshi Nara (ed.): A Computer-Assisted Study of South-Asian Languages. Tokyo: Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa. 30-40

Osada, Toshiki. 1996. “Notes on the Proto-Kherwarian vowel system.” Indo-Iranian Journal 39:245-258 

Osada, Toshiki. 1999. “Experiential constructions in Mundari.” In: Gengo Kenkyu: Journal of the Linguistic Society of Japan, 115:51-76

Osada, Toshiki. 2001. “Reciprocals in Mundari.” V. Nedjalkov and Z. Guentcheva, eds. Typology of the Reciprocal Constructions. München: Lincom Europa

Osada, Toshiki. 2001. Deeney’s Ho-English Dictionary with Mundari and Hindi words. International Research Center for Japanese Studies

Osborne, Rosalind Anne. 2009. “Who’s Who in Kmhmu’: Referring Expressions and Participant Identification in Selected Kmhmu’ Narrative Texts / Rosalind Ann Osborne.” Chiang Mai, Thailand: Payap University. http://www.sil.org/silepubs/Pubs/52451/Osborne_WhosWhoKmhmu_52451.pdf.

Ostapirat, Weera. 2000 . Proto-Kra, Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area, Volume 23.1.

Ostapirat, Weera. 2009. Early and Modern Pearic Registers/Tones. Paper presented at the 4th International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mahidol University, Oct. 29-30 2009.

Ostapirat, Weera. 2005. Kra–Dai and Austronesian: Notes on phonological correspondences and vocabulary distribution. In Sagart, Laurent; Blench, Roger; Sanchez-Mazas, Alicia (eds.). The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics. London: Routledge Curzon. pp. 107–131.

Ozanne- Rivierre, Francoise, 1986. Redoublement expressif et dédoublement des séries consonantiques dans les langues des Iles Loyauté (Nouvelle Calédonie). Te Reo (29), 25- 53.

Pailin Yantreesingh. 1980. The phonology of the Kuay language of Suphanburi with comparison to the Kuy language of Surin. Mahidol University MA thesis. 

Paiyaphrohm, Kharom. 1990. “Anthropological Linguistics in Mlabri / การศึกษาวิจัยทางมานุษยวิทยาภาษาศาสตร์ภาษามลาบรี (ผีตองเหลือง).” Mahidol University.

PAN HLA & Emmanuel GULLON. 1972. A Mon copperplate in the National Library of Bangkok. JBRS 55. 9-17. [Re-publication of Mon inscription [16th c. AD]; see also Cham THONGKHAMWAN in Silpakorn 1961.3.5.56-58, in Thai]

PAN HLA. 1974. Comparative study of old and Modern Mon. Bulletin of the Kagoshima University. pp. 1-22.

PAN HLA. 1975. Comparative study of Old and Modern Burmese. JBRS 58. 53-78. [contains a Mon (OM/LM) vocabulary and some notes on syntax]

PAN HLA. 1976. A Comparative study of Old Mon epigraphy and modern Mon. in: P. N. JENNET et al. , eds., Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu University Press of Hawaii. Vol. II. 891-918. [discusses orthography, phonology and morphology of OM; coparative chart of spellings]

Pancharoen, La-or (ละออ แป้นเจริญ). 1983. “Mon grammar / ระบบไวยากรณ์มอญ.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55651&language=thai.

Panda, Shishir Kumar. 2001. “PROCESS OF URBANISATION IN EARLY ORISSA.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 62: 54–63.

Panda, Shishir Kumar. 2007. “ETHNIC SETTLEMENTS IN EARLY ORISSA.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 68: 81–88. 

Pannetier, Adrien Louis Marie. s. d. Notes sur les Pears, accompagné d’un vocabulaire. Manuscript EFEO-Paris. [not easily usable]

Panthongkhum, Panpot (พรรณน์พจน์ ปานทองคำ). 1982. “A description of Mon language of Bangkhanmak, Lopburi: an Austroasiatic language in Thailand / ภาษามอญ ตำบลบางขันหมาก จังหวัดลพบุรี.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55659&language=thai.

Parasher, Aloka, and Aloka Parashar. 1983a. “ASSIMILATION CONSERVATION AND EXPANSION—Complex Strategies of Tribal Absorption in the Early Indian Context.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 44: 707–30.

Parasher, Aloka, and Aloka Parashar. 1983b. “ASSIMILATION CONSERVATION AND EXPANSION—Complex Strategies of Tribal Absorption in the Early Indian Context.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 44: 707–30.

Parasher, Aloka, and Aloka Parashar. 1983c. “ASSIMILATION CONSERVATION AND EXPANSION—Complex Strategies of Tribal Absorption in the Early Indian Context.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 44: 707–30.

Parkin, Robert. 1991. A Guide to Austroasiatic Speakers and Their Languages. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications No.23. Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press.

Pastor, Job. 1935. Khar.iya durang, Hymns in Kharia Durang. Golaghat

Patel, Paramananda & Sriya Nayak. 1991. Lanjia Saora [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Harijan & Tribal Welfare Department, Tribal Language Study Series, X) (in Oriya)

Patel, Paramananda & Sunita Tripathy. 1993. Mundari. [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialrcts (Government of Orissa, Tribal Welfare Department, Tribal Language Study Series, XIII) (in Mundari)

Patnaik, Manideepa. 1996. “A preliminary note on Lexical Anaphors and Pronouns in Juang.” Barbara Lust et al. (eds.). Lexical anaphors and pronouns in select South Asian Languages. Mouton de Gruyter. 841-59

Patnaik, Manideepa. 1998. “Quotative Agreement in Juang” Paper presented at the International Conference on Agreement, Delhi University, Delhi 

Patnaik, Manideepa. 1999. Aspects of Juang Syntax. Unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Delhi University, Delhi

Patnaik, Manideepa. in press. Grammatical sketch of Juang. München: Lincom Europa

Patnaik, N. (ed.). 1989. The Juang. Bhubaneswar, Orissa: Tribal and Harijan Research-cum-Training Institute (Popular Series on Tribes, 2)

Patpitak, Kunwadee (กุลวดี แพทย์พิทักษ์). 1996. “A description of the Chong language in Klong Seng village, Borrai district, Trat province / ภาษาชอง หมู่บ้านคลองแสง ตำบลด่านชุมพล อำเภอบ่อไร่ จังหวัดตราด.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56549&language=thai.

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Gorum Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Gta Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Juang Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Kharia Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Korku Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Remo Dictionary

Patricia Donegan & David Stampe’s Online Sora Dictionary

Patricia J. Donegan & David Stampe, 2004. Rhythm and the synthetic drift of Munda, in Rajendra Singh (ed.), The Yearbook of South Asian Languages and Linguistics 2004, pp. 3-36.

Pattanayak, D.P. 1968. “Some comments on Parenga Kinship terms.” Emeneau Festschrift Volume of Indian Linguistics. 250-56

Paulsen, Debbie Lynn. 1989. A Phonological Reconstruction of Proto-Plang. M.A. Thesis, The University of Texas at Arlington.

Paulsen, Debbie. 1989-1990. A Phonological Reconstruction of Proto-Plang. Mon-Khmer Studies 18-19:160-222. 

Pavie, Auguste. 1881-82. Excursion dans le Cambodge et le Royaume de Siam, III. Excursions et Reconnaissances 4(10): 99-146. [voc. tchiong 114-116]

Pawley, Andrew & Medina Pawley 1994. Early Austronesian terms for canoe parts and seafaring. In: A.K. Pawley & M.D. Ross (eds.), Austronesian terminologies: continuity and change. 329-61. Canberra: PL Series C-127.

Pawley, Andrew and Kaye Green, 1971. Lexical evidence for the Proto-Polynesian homeland. Te Reo (14), 1-36.

Pawley, Andrew and Malcolm Ross, forthcoming. Austronesian historical linguistics and culture history. Annual Review of Anthropology, 22.

Pawley, Andrew and Medina Pawley, forthcoming. Early Austronesian terms for canoe parts and seafaring. In, Pawley, Andrew and Malcolm Ross, eds. Austronesian Terminologies: continuity and change. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, C.

Pawley, Andrew and Roger C. Green, 1985. The Proto- Oceanic language community. In Kirk,

Pawley, Andrew, 1966. Polynesian languages: A subgrouping based on shared innovations in morphology. Journal of the Polynesian Society, 39- 64.

Pawley, Andrew, 1972. On the internal relationships of eastern Oceanic languages, in Green, R.C. & M. Kelly (eds), Studies in Oceanic Culture History, Vol. 3. Pacific Anthropological Records No. 13, 3- 106. Honolulu: Bernice P. Bishop Museum

Pawley, Andrew, 1973. Some problems in Proto- Oceanic grammar. Oceanic Linguistics (12), 103- 188.

Pawley, Andrew, 1975. The relationships of the Austronesian languages of Central Papua: A preliminary study, in Dutton, T.E. (ed.), Studies in Languages of Central and South- East Papua. Pacific Linguistics (C- 29), 3- 105. Canberra: Australian National University.

Pawley, Andrew, 1977. On Redefining 'Eastern Oceanic'. Mimeo. 

Pawley, Andrew, 1978. The New Guinea Oceanic hypothesis. Kivung: Journal of the Linguistic Society of Papua New Guinea, 11:99-151.

Pawley, Andrew, 1979. New evidence on the position of Rotuman. University of Auckland Working Papers in Anthropology, Archaeology, Linguistics and Maori Studies (52).

Pawley, Andrew, 1981. Melanesian diversity and Polynesian homogeneity: a unified explanation for language. In Hollyman, Jim, and Andrew Pawley (eds). Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures in Honour of Bruce Biggs. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Pawley, Andrew, 1982. Rubbish- man commoner, big man chief? Linguistic evidence for hereditary chieftainship in Proto- Oceanic, in Siikala, Jukka (ed.), Oceanic Studies: Essays in Honour of Aarne A. Koskinen. Suomen Antropologinen Seura, 33- 52. Helsinki: The Finnish Anthropological Society.

Pawley, Andrew, and Malcolm Ross, eds. forthcoming. Austronesian Terminologies: continuity and change. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, C.

PE MAUNG TIN & G. H. LUCE [eds.]. 1939. Inscriptions of Burma. [Portfolio III: BE 630-663 (AD 1269-1300)]. London, Oxford UP (=University of Rangoon Oriental Studies Series Publication, 4) [Mon inscriptions DMI 26, 44, 45, as collotype plates]

PE MAUNG TIN & LUCE [eds.] 1956. Inscriptions of Burma. [portfolio VI: down to BE 702 (AD 1340-1364)[ ] (=University of Rangoon Oriental Studeis Publications Nos. 5-6). [see also #167; dates refer to Burm. Inscrr. only; DMI inscr. 3, 4, 6, 7, 9, 10, 24,25; 15, 17, 19,21]

PE MAUNG TIN. 1913. Note to Duroiselle’s Talaing Nassayas. JBRS 3.145-146.

PE MAUNG TIN. 1938. A Mon inscription by Kyanzittha at Ayetthema hill. JBRS 28.92-94. [discusses original location of BE inscription No. V]

PE MAUNG TIN. 1955. Myazedi mun kyauksa. Rangoon,[ ]. [Myazedi Mon inscr.] [in Burmese] [not seen]

Peiros, Ilia and Shnirelman, V. 1998. “Rice in Southeast Asia: a regional interdisciplinary approach.” In: Roger Blench and Matthew Spriggs (eds.) Archaeology and Language, archaeological data and Linguistic hypotheses II. London, Routledge. pp. 379-389.

Peiros, Ilia. 1996. Katuic Comparative Dictionary. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Peiros, Ilia. 1996b. Nihali and Austroasiatic. Mother Tongue 2:75-90.

Peiros, Ilia. 1997. Macro Families: Can a Mistake be Detected? In Hegedu!s et al. (eds.) (1997) pp265-292.

Peiros, Ilia. 1998. Comparative Linguistics in Southeast Asia. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics  (C-142).

Peiros, Ilia. 2004. Genetičeskaja klassifikacija avstroaziatskix jazykov. Moskva: Rossijskij gosudarstvennyj gumanitarnyj universitet (doktorskaja dissertacija).

Peiros, Ilia. 2005. Austro-Asiatic Etymology Database, uploaded 14 Oct. 2005 to http://starling.rinet.ru/cgi-bin/main.cgi?flags=eygtnnl 

Peiros, Ilia. 2011. Some thoughts on the problem of the Austro-Asiatic homeland. Journal of Language Relationship. 6:101-113

Peiros, Ilia. 2013. “Linguistic Contacts in Ancient East Asia.” http://starling.rinet.ru/confer/01_Peiros.pdf 

Peiros, Ilia.. 1989. Dopolnenie k gipoteze S.A.Starostina o rodstve nostraticheskix i sinokavkazskix jazykov. Lingvisticheskaja rekonstrukcija i drevnejshaja istorija vostoka: Materialy k diskussijam na mezhdunarodnoj konferencii (Moskva, 29 Maja - 2 Ijunja 1989g.) Chast' 1. Moskva, Nauka.\

Pelliot, Paul. 1902. Mémoires sur les coutumes du Cambodge. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 2(2): 123-177. Traduction du texte de Tcheou Ta-Kouan.

Pelliot, Paul. 1903. Le Fou-nan. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 3.2:248-303.

Pelliot, Paul. 1904. Deux itinéraires de la Chine en Inde à la fin du VIIIe siècle. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 4: 131-413.

Pelliot, Paul. 1951. Mémoires sur les coutumes du Cambodge. OEuvres posthumes de P. Pelliot. Paris: Adrien Maisonneuve. Traduction revue et augmentée de la traduction publiée en 1902.

Pendercast, M.H. 1881. “Short vocabulary of the Savara language” JRAS 13:245-8.

Perret, Daniel (ed.) 2018. Writing for eternity. A survey of epigraphy in Southeast Asia.  Paris: École Française dÉxtrême Orient.

PERRIN, J[ean]. 1966. A propos d’un Buddha date du pays môn. in: BA SHIN et al., Essays offered to G. H. Luce by his colleagues and friends in honour of his 75th birthday. Ascona, Artibus Asiae, Vol. 2, 149-155. [dates a Buddha sculpture found at Pa-an district 1665 AD: date given on inscription, in Mon]

Peterson, John. (submitted). Kharia. A South Munda Language.

Peterson, John. 2001. “Propositional Attribution in Kharia”. Manuscript. 28pp (+ 11pp. Appendix). Copy available from the author

Peterson, John. 2001. “The Expression of Semantic Depictives in Kharia (Munda, Austro-Asiatic)” Paper held at the workshop “Depictive secondary predicates in cross-linguistic perspective”, Ruhr-Universität Bochum, 7-9 June 2001. Copy available from the author

Peterson, John. 2002. “”Problematic” Words in Kharia”. Paper held at “Kaukasische Tage”, a workshop on the status of words from a cross-linguistic perspective. Universität Osnabrück, June 7, 2002

Peterson, John. 2002. “Morphological and Semantic Finiteness in Kharia: A first look” Michael Bommes, Doris Tophinke & Christina Noack (eds.). Sprache als Form. Eine Festschrift für Utz Maas. Wiesbaden: Westdeutscher Verlag. 63-73 

Peterson, John. 2005. “There’s a grain of truth in every “myth”, or, Why the discussion of lexical classes in Mundari isn’t quite over yet.” Linguistic Typology 9/3:391-405

Peterson, John. 2009 A Kharia-English Lexicon. Himalayan Linguistics, Archive 5. i-xv, 1-212.

Peterson, John. 2011. A Grammar of Kharia. Leiden ; Boston; Brill.

Peterson, John. in press. “Kharia.” To appear in Gregory D.S. Anderson & Norman H. Zide (eds.). The Munda Languages. Curzon Press. 70pp. 

Peterson, John. in press. “The “totality” morpheme -may in Kharia.” Ram Dayal Munda (ed.). Felicitation Volume for Norman Zide.

Peterson, John. 2017. Fitting the pieces together – Towards a linguistic prehistory of eastern_central South Asia (and beyond). Journal of South Asian Languages and Linguistics, 4.2:211-257.

Peterson, Mary M. 1997.  Kensiw Grammar: Basic Declarative, Interrogative and Imperative Propositions.  Bangkok, TU-SIL-LRDP Thammasat University.

Petrie, C., Bates, J., Higham, T., & Singh, R. 2016. Feeding ancient cities in South Asia: Dating the adoption of rice, millet and tropical pulses in the Indus civilisation. Antiquity 90(354):1489-1504. doi:10.15184/aqy.2016.210

Peyraube, Alain. 1996. Recent issues in Chinese historical syntax. In C. T. James Huang and Y. H. Audrey Li (eds.) New Horizons in Chinese Linguistics. Dordrecht: Kluwer. pp. 161–213. 

Pfeffer, Georg. 1994. “The Dualistic Culture of the Juang.” In: G.C. Tripathi & Hermann Kulke (eds.): 103-16

Ph[]%ng, Foà (Editorial Supervisor) 1996. Vietnam: Image of the Community of 54 Ethnic Groups. (place and publisher not indicated— I have a defective copy which I obtained in Vientiane)

Phaiboon Daungchan. 1986. La Chasse Chez les Sakai en Thailande Meridionale. Paris, Ecole des Hautes Etudes en Sciences Sociales, Memoire pour le D.E.A.

Phaiboon Daungchan. 1998. "Ngoh Pa or Sakai's Background." In Ornsara Saibua, ed., In the Summary of the National Seminar about Sakai. Bangkok: Literature and History Office, the Fine Arts Department. pp. 85-94, 

Phaiboon Daungchan. 1998. Words and Sentences in the Sakai Language. Humanities Review. 20 [2nd Academic Year of 1998], pp. 47-61.

Phaiboon Duangchan. 1984. A Phonological Description of the Kensiw Language (A Sakai Dialect). MA Thesis Mahidol University.

Phaiboon Duangchan. 2006. Glossary of Aslian Languages: the northern Aslian languages of southern Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies. 36: 207-224.

Phakphian, Saowanee (เสาวณีย์ พากเพียร). 1989. “Phonology of Sakai Taen-aen in Palian village, Palian district, Trang province / การศึกษาระบบเสียงภาษาชาโกแต็นแอ๊น ตำบลปะเหลียน อำเภอปะเหลียน จังหวัดตรัง.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56030&language=thai.

Pham, Hoa. (2002). Gender in addressing and self-reference in Vietnamese: Variation and change. In M. Hellinger & H. Bußmann (Eds.), Gender across languages: The linguistic representation of women and men (Vol. 2, pp. 281-312). IMPACT: Studies in language society (No. 10). John Benjamins. 

Phan, John. 2012. “Mường is not a subgroup: Phonological evidence for a paraphyletic taxon in the Viet-Muong sub-family.” Mon-Khmer Studies 40:1-18.

Phanthamas, Phramaha Piyawat (พระมหาปิยะวัฒน์ พันธมาศ). 2005. “A description of Kuy at Saway village, Saway sub-district, Prangku district, Sisaket province / ภาษากูยที่บ้านสวาย ตำบลสวาย อำเภอปรางค์กู่ จังหวัดศรีสะเกษ.” Silpakorn University.

Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society.

Philips, Richard L. and Y-Kem Kpo'r. 1974. Mnong Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No.11. Manila, Summer Insititute of Linguistics.

Phillips, Jeremiah. 1845/1852. A Santali Primer. Calcutta: School Book Society

Phillips, Jeremiah. 1852. An Introduction to the Santali language. Calcutta

Phillips, R., Phillips, J. and Miller, C. 1976, "The Brũ vowel system: alternate analyses", in The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal, vol. 5, pp. 203-217.

Phillips, Richard L, Hôi-Thánh & Tin-Lành. 1961. Glossary of the Hrê language of the Minh-Long district, Guang Ngai province, Vietnam: Hrê-Vietnamese-English. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications.

Phillips, Richard L. 1959. Survey Word Lists March 1959. Copy held at Summer Insititute of Linguistics Library Bangkok (Todrah & Monam folder 495.966).

Phillips, Richard L. 1962. Voice Register in Mon-Khmer Languages. ms. copy at Summer Insititute of Linguistics Library Bangkok (Mon-Khmer folder 495.9).

Phillips, Richard L. 1971. Phonological Reconstruction of Proto-Bahnaric. s.l., ms

Phillips, Richard L. 1973. Vowel distribution in Hre. Mon-Khmer Studies 4: 63-68.

Phillips, Richard L. 1973. A Mnong pedagogical grammar: the verb phrase and constructions with two or more verbs. Mon-Khmer Studies. 4:129-138 

Phillips, Richard. 1959. Vietnam Tribes Survey Word Lists: Cua (=Traw). (ms. dated July 1959, copy held by David Thomas Library, Bangkok, folder 495.968)

Phillips, Timothy C. 2005. Jah Hut data. Personal field notes.

Phillips, Timothy C. 2005. Linguistic Comparison Of Semai Dialects. Economic Planning Unit, Prime Minister's Department, Malaysia.

Phillips, Timothy C. 2012. Proto-aslian: towards an understanding of its historical linguistic systems, principles and processes. PhD thesis, Institut Alam Dan Tamadun Melayu Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Bangi.

Phillips, Timothy. ms. nd. A Survey of Nasal Preplosion in Aslian Languages. 

Phimjun, Thitiporn (ธิติพร พิมพ์จันทร์). 2004. “A comparative study of lexical items and attitudes of Kuy, Kuay and Nyeu speakers in Sisaket province / การศึกษาเปรียบเทียบคำศัพท์และทัศนคติระหว่างผู้พูดภาษากูย กวย และเญอ ในจังหวัดศรีสะเกษ.” Mahidol University.

Phirunsarn, Suntaree (สุนทรี พิรุณสาร). 1981. “Angkorian Khmer scripts / อักษรขอมสมัยพระนคร.” Silpakorn University.

Phiukhou, Subhab. 1986. “A Phonological Description of Nyah Kur at Ban Nam Lat, Chaiyaphum Province.” Mahidol University.

Phon-ngam, Prakorb. 1987. “A phonological comparison of spoken Central Khmer (Phnom Penh) and Northern Khmer (Surin) =: ระบบเสียงภาษาเขมรพนมเปญเปรียบเทียบกับระบบเสียงภาษาเขมรสุรินทร์.” Mahidol University.

Phon-ngam, Prakorb. 1999. “A Morphological Study of Northern Khmer / การศึกษาระบบหน่วยคำภาษาเขมรถิ่นไทย.” Mahidol University.

Phra Acharn WINATASÂRO. 1978. [na?sw: b?:p ri?n pha:sa: m?:n ra:man – lem 1.] Bangkok, Wintasarakarn Printing Shop. 8pp. [Mon syllabary with Thai phonetic spellings; in Thai]

Phromthong, Sa-ard. 1996. “The Relationship between Language Use and Language Attitude in Kuy Community in Uthumphornphisai, Srisaket / ความสัมพันธ์ระหว่างการใช้ภาษาและทัศนคติทางภาษาของชุมชนกูย อำเภออุทุมพรพิสัย จังหวัดศรีษะเกษ.” Mahidol University.

Phuget, Sujika. 1996. “A Phonological Study of Vietnamese in Aranyaprathet District, Sa-Kaeo Province / การศึกษาระบบเสียงภาษาเวียดนาม อำเภออรัญประเทศ จังหวัดสระแก้ว.” Mahidol University.

Phuthorn PHUMATHON [comp./ed.] 1981. [ca:rík bo:ra:n re^:k phóp thî: lópbu:ri: l?? Klây khi??.] [Early inscriptions found in Lopburi and neighbouring provinces]. Lopburi, King Narai National Museum/Bangkok, Fine Arts Department. 127pp., ill. [contains Pali-Sanskrit, Pali-Mon, and Old Mon inscriptions found in Lophuri and Saraburi; articles in Thai by various authors; epigraphic readings in some cases unreliable. #214 in English]

Phyu, Myint Myint. 2013. “A Sociolinguistic Survey of Selected Meung Yum and Savaiq Varieties.” Payap University.

Piat, Martine. 1962. Quelques correspondances entre le Khmer et le Bru, langue montagnard du Centre Vietnam. Bulletin de la Société des Études Indochinoises, 37: 311-323.

Pike, Kenneth L. 1949. Phonemics: a technique for reducing languages to writing. Ann Arbor, University of Michigan Press.

Pike, Kenneth. 1947. Phonemics. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press.

Ping, Phung Wei. 2013. “A Phonological Description of Meung Yum and Phonological Comparison of Meung Yum with Three Wa Dialects In China.” Payap University.

Pinnow, H.J. 1961. “Eine neue Schrift und Geheimsprache bei den Ho von Singbhum - Ein vorläufiger Bericht.” Manuscript

Pinnow, H.-J. 1972. Schrift und Sprache in den Werken Lako Bodras im Gebiet der Ho von Singbhum (Bihar). Anthropos 67. 822-57

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1954. “Grundzüge einer Phonetik der Kharia Sprache.” Unpublished Manuscript, Berlin

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1959. Versuch Einer Historischen Lautlehre Der Kharia-Sprache. Wiesbaden, Otto Harrassowitz.

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1960. “Beiträge zur Kenntnis der Juang-Sprache.” Unpublished Manuscript, Berlin

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1960. Über den Ursprung der voneinander abweichenden Strukturen der Munda- und Khmer-Nicobar Sprachen,. Indo-Iranian Journal 4.1:81-103.

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1963. The position of the Muṇḍā languages within the Austroasiatic language family. in: H.L. Shorto (ed.). Linguistic Comparison in Southeast Asia and the Pacific. London: SOAS. 140-52 

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1965. “Der Wertiger und andere Texte, aufgezeichnet von Junas Kullu, übersetzt und mitgeteilt unter Mitwirkung von Paulus Kerketta.” Indo-Iranian Journal 9/1:32-68

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1965. “Personal pronouns in the Austroasiatic languages: a historical study.” Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies 1:3-42

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1965. Kharia-Texte (Prosa und Poesie). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1966. A Comparative Study of the Verb in the Munda Languages. In: Norman H. Zide (ed.): Studies in Comparative Austroasiatic Linguistics. The Hague, Mouton (Indo-Iranian Monographs, V). 96-193

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1968. “Eine Mythe der Juang.” Mouton. Pratidanam

Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen. 1979. Reflections On the History of the Khmer Phonemic System. Mon-Khmer Studies 8:103-130. 

Pittayawat Pittayaporn. 2009. The Phonology of Proto-Tai. PhD dissertation Cornell University.

Pittayaporn, Pittayawat. 2015. Typologizing sesquisyllabicity: the role of structural analysis in the study of linguistic diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In N.J. Enfield and Bernard Comrie (eds.) Mainland Southeast Asian Languages. Berlin: De Gruyter. pp. 500-528.

Pittman, Richmond. 1959. Jarai as a member of the Malayo-Polynesian family of languages. Asian Culture 1.4:59-67.

Pittman, Richmond. 1996. A Southeast Asian Refinement to Phonological Theory. Mon-Khmer Studies 26:191-196.

Ploykaew, Pornsawan. 2001. Samre grammar. PhD thesis. Institute of Languages and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.

Ploykaew, Pornsawan. 2001. The phonology of Samre, Mon-Khmer Studies 31:15-27.

Ploykaew, Pornsawan. 2005. The study of Samre’s world view : the belief in sorcerer spirits. Mon-Khmer Studies 35: 171-182.

Pogibenko, T. G. and Bùi Khánh-Thê. 1990. Iazyk Ksingmul. Materialy sovetsko-v'etnamskoj lingvisticheskoj ekspeditsii 1979 goda. Moscow, Nauka.

Pokorny, Julius. 1959. Indogermanisches etymologisches Wörterbuch. Bern, Franke Verlag.

Polivanov, E.D. 1937. A propos d'un mot indo-européen de provenance chinoise *(t)su@-s < ancien chinois *c&u 'cachon'. Archiv Orientální 9.3: 405-406.

Polomé, Edgar & Werner Winter (eds.). 1992. Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Berlin & New York, Mouton de Gruyter.

Ponette, P., S.J. no date. Munda Proverbs and Sayings. Collected and Translated by P. Ponette, S.J. Ranchi: Catholic Press

Ponette, P., S.J. no date. Singbonga and the Spirit World of the Mundas. Ed. & Translated by P. Ponette, S.J. Ranchi: Catholic Press

Pongi, F. Rev. et al. 1985. Ro Tarik 1, Car Nicobarese Primer Level 1. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Portman, M.V. 1898. Notes on the Languages of the South Andaman Group of Tribes. Calcutta: Superintendent of Government Press

Portman, Maurice Vidal. 1898. Notes on the languages of the South Andaman group of tribes. Calcutta, India, Office of the Superintendent of Government Printing.

Poser, William. 1982. Phonological representations and action at a distance. The structure of phonological representations (part II), ed. by H. van der Hulst and N. Smith, 213-55. Dordrecht: Foris.

Post, Mark W. 2011. ‘Prosody and typological drift in Austroasiatic and Tibeto-Burman: Against “Sinosphere” and “Indosphere”.’ In Sophana Srichampa, Paul Sidwell and Kenneth Gregerson (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies: papers from ICAAL4. Mon-Khmer Studies Journal Special Issue No. 3. Dallas, SIL International; Salaya, Mahidol University; Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp.198-221.

Pou, Saveros and Philip N. Jenner. 1975. Proto-Indonesian and Mon-Khmer. Asian Perspectives XVII, 2, 112-24. 

Pou, Saveros. 1992. Dictionnaire vieux khmer-français-anglais: An Old Khmer-French-English Dictionary . Paris, Cenre de documentation et de recerche sur la civilisation khmère.

Pou, Saverous. 1996. Les termes grammaticaux du vieux khmer (VIe-XIVe siècle). Bulletin de l'École française d'Extrême-Orient 83:21-34.

Pou, Saverous. and Philip Jenner. 1974. Proto-Indonesian and Mon-Khmer. Asian Perspectives. 17.2:112-124.

Prachakij-karacak, Praya. 1995. Some Languages of Siam. Translated and annotated by David Thomas & Sophana Srichampa. Bangkok, Mahidol University.

prasAd svarNalatA. no date. asurI vArtAlAp nirdeSikA. rAMcI: bihAr jan jAtIya kalyAN Sodh saMsthAn

Prasad, Nilkanth (compiler). 1940. Korku-Hindi-English Dictioanry. nAgpur: sarkArI chApAkhAnA, madhyaprAnta va barAr

prasAd, S. 1988. santAlI-hindI SabdakoS. Ranchi: bihAr janjAtIya kalyAN Sodh saMsthAn

prasâd, svarn.alatâ. ca. 1986. birhor vârtâlâp nirde´sikâ. râ~cî: bihâr janjâtîya kalyân. ´sodh sa~sthân

Prasad, Swarnalata. 1961. “A Study of Ho Dialect.” Ranchi. Bulletin of the Bihar Tribal Research Institute III/1:1-36

Prasert Sriwises. 1978. Kui (Suai)-Thai-English dictionary. Bangkok, Chulalongkorn University. 

Preecha Sukgasame. 1988. Phonological interference between Kuay and Northeastern Thai in Surin. Mahidol University MA thesis. 

Preecha Sukgasame. 1993. Correlates of the register complex in Kuay. Mon-Khmer Studies 22:245–251. 

Preedaporn Srisakorn. 2008. So (Thavung) Grammar. Phd Thesis, Mahidol Univesity (Thailand). 

Preisig, Elisabeth, Somseng Sayavong & Suksavang Simana'. 1994. Kmhmu'-Lao-French-English Dictionary. Vientiane, Ministry of Information and Culture.

Premsing, S.K. 1976. “Verb BE in Khasi.” K.V. Subbarao (ed.). Papers in Linguistic Analysis. Delhi: Delhi University. 11-24

Premsirat, S. 1993. Thai-Khmu-English Dictionary. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University, Salaya.

Premsrirat, Suwilai. 2000. So (Thavung) Preliminary Dictionary. Salaya & Melbourne, Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University and

the University of Melbourne. 

Premsrirat, Suwilai. 2001. Tonogenesis in Khmu Dialect of SEA. Mon-Khmer Studies 31:47-56.

Premsrirat, Suwilai. 2002. Thesaurus of Khmu Dialects in Southeast Asia. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development Mahidol University, Thailand.

Promrat, Wichat. 1999. “A Study of the Numeral Classifiers in Present Standard Khmer =: การศึกษาคำลักษณะนามบอกคำจำนวนนับภาษาเขมรมาตรฐานในปัจจุบัน.” Mahidol University.

Proschan, Frank. 1987. Bibliography of Kmhmu (Khmu, Kammu). Manuscript. Washington D.C.

Proschan, Frank. 1996. A Survey of Khmuic and Palaungic Languages in Laos and Vietnam. Pan-Asiatic Linguistics, 3:895-919.

Pryse, Rev. W. 1855. Introduction to the Khasia language, comprising a Grammar, selections for reading, and a vocabulary. Calcutta

Przyludski, Jean. 1929. Further Notes on Non-Aryan Loans in Indo-Aryan, in P.C. Bagchi (ed.): pp.145–149, Pre-Aryan and Pre-Dravidian in India, Calcutta University Press.

Przyluski, Jean 1924. Les langues austroasiatiques. In Antoine Meillet and Marcel Cohen (eds.). Les Langues du Monde (Collection linguistique publiée par la société de linguistique de Paris), 16. Paris, Librarie Ancienne Edouard Champion, pp 335-403.

Pulleyblank, E. G. 1983. The Chinese and Their Neighbours in Prehistoric and Early Historic Times. In David Knightly (ed.) The Origins of Chinese Civilization, University of California Press.

Purtle, Dale. 1970. Manuscript vocabulary of Chong collected at Veal Renh, Kampot Province.

Puxley, E.L. 1868. Vocabulary of the Santali Language. London: W.M. Watts

Rabel, Lili E. 1961. Khasi, a language of Assam. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press

Rabel, Lili E. 1968. “Redundant expressions in Khasi.” Volume presented to M.B. Emeneau in his sixtieth birthday year, Studies in Indian Linguistics. Poona

Rabel, Lili E. n.d. “Khasi names in the Khasi Hills District.” Names 9:122-25 (Berkeley)

Rabel, Lili. 1961. Khasi, a language of Assam. Baton Rouge, Louisiana State University Studies Hamanities Series. 

Rabel-Heymann, Lili E. 1976. “Analysis of Loanwords in Khasi.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 971-1034 

Rabel-Heymann, Lili. 1976. Sound Symbolism in Khasi Adverbs. Pacific Linguistics Series C-No.42. Canberra, Australian National University, pp 253-262.

Radhakrishnan, R. “Nancowry Numerals.” Presented at the Second Interational Congress of Austroasiatic Linguistics, 1978, Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Radhakrishnan, R. 1970. A preliminary descriptive analysis of Nancowry. PhD. dissertation. Department of Linguistics, University of Chicago.

Radhakrishnan, R. 1976. “A Note on the Morphology of the Causative in Nancowry.” Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies, Two Volumes. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II: 1035-1040 

Radhakrishnan, R. 1978. On Central Nicobarese. In Diffloth, G. and Stampe, D. (eds.) Papers of the Second International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics. Mysore, India. 

Radhakrishnan, R. 1981. The Nancowry word: phonology, affixual morphology and roots of a Nicobarese language. Current inquiry into language and linguistics, 37, Edmonton, Alberta, Linguistic Research Inc.

Radloff, Carla. 1991. Sentence Repetition Testing for Studies of Community Bilingualism. Dallas: Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Rajasingh V R 2010. Personal Pronouns in Muöt. In Nagaraja K S and Kashyap Mankodi (eds.) Austroasiatic Linguistics. Mysore, India: Central Institute of Indian Languages. 

Rajasingh V R 2011. “Demonstratives in Muöt”. In Sophana Srichampa, Paul Sidwell and Ken Gregerson (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies: papers from ICAAL4. Mon‒Khmer Studies Journal Special Issue No. 3. Dallas, SIL International; Salaya, Mahidol University; Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp. 89‒99.

Rajasingh V. R. 2013. Negators in Muöt. Mon‒Khmer Studies, 41:46‒59.

Rajasingh V. R. 2014. Interrogation in Muöt. Mon‒Khmer Studies, 43.1:103‒123.                    

Rajasingh V. R. 2016. Mūöt (Nicobarese). Mon‒Khmer Studies 45.14-52

Rajendran, S. 2002. Kharia In "Linguistic Survey of India Special Studies: Orissa", B.P. Mahapatra, editor. Language Division, Office of the Registrar General, pp. 372-398.  

Ramachandra Rao, V. 1981. The Sound System of Remo. Unpublished Master's thesis. Osmania University, Hyderabad

Ramamurti, G.V. 1931. A manual of the So:ra (or Savara) language. Madras: Government Press

Ramamurti, G.V. 1938. Sora - English Dictionary. New Delhi, Mittal [Reprinted: 1986].

Ramaswami, N. 1992. Bhumij Grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Ramsay, E.W. 1914. Vocabulary of Words in the Kurku Language, English-Kurku. Calcutta

Ramsay, E.W. 1940. Korku-Hindi-English Dictionary. Nagpur

Rao, Ch. Purnachandra & V. Lakshmipathi Sastri. 1989. Village Re-study Monograph on Kalliti (Vizianagaram District). Delhi: Controller of Publications (Census of India, 1981, Series 2 - Andhra Pradesh, Part X-C)

Ratanakul, Suriya, David Thomas and Suwilai Premsrirat (eds.). 1985. Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies presented to Andre-G. Haudricourt. Bangkok, Mahidol University.

Ratanakul, Suriya. 1986. Lawa-Thai Dictionary. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University, Salaya.

Ratanakul, Suriya. 1987. Thai - Lawa Dictionary. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University, Salaya.

Rathinasabapathy Elangaiyan et al., 1995. Shompen–Hindi Bilingual Primer Śompen Bhāratī 1. Port Blair and Mysore.

Ratliff, Martha & Erik Schiller (eds.). 1992. Papers from the First Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1991. Tempe, Arizona State University.

Ratliff, Martha. 2010. Hmong–Mien language history. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics. 

Rau, Felix and Paul Sidwell. 2019. The Munda Maritime Hypothesis. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 12.2:35-57. 

Ray, Himanshu Prabha. 2017. “Maritime Archaeology of the Indian Ocean.” Oxford Research Encyclopedia of Asian History, February. https://doi.org/10.1093/acrefore/9780190277727.013.27.

Ray, Sidney Herbert, 1926. A Comparative Study of the Melanesian Island Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Reddy, B. Mohan, B. T. Langstieh, Vikrant Kumar, T. Nagaraja, A. N. S. Reddy, Aruna Meka, A. G. Reddy, K. Thangaraj, and Lalji Singh. 2007. “Austro-Asiatic Tribes of Northeast India Provide Hitherto Missing Genetic Link between South and Southeast Asia.” PLOS ONE 2 (11): e1141. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0001141.

Rehberg, Kerstin. 2003. Phonologie des Kharia. Prosodische Strukturen und segmentales Inventar. Universität Osnabrück, Germany. Unpublished Master’s thesis

Reich, David, Kumarasamy Thangaraj, Nick Patterson, Alkes L. Price, and Lalji Singh. 2009. “Reconstructing Indian Population History.” Nature 461 (7263): 489–94. https://doi.org/10.1038/nature08365.

Reid, Lawrence A. 1994. Morphological evidence for Austric. Oceanic Linguistics 33(2):323-344. 

Reid, Lawrence A. 1996. The current state of linguistic research on the relatedness of the language families of East and Southeast Asia. In Ian C. Glover & Peter Bellwood (eds.), Indo-Pacific Prehistory: The Chiang Mai Papers, Volume 2, Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association 15. Canberra, Australian National University. pp . 87-91.

Reid, Lawrence A. 1999. New linguistic evidence for the Austric hypothesis. In Elizabeth Zeitoun & Paul Jen-kuei Li (eds.) Selected Papers from the Eighth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics. Taipei, Academia Sinica. pp. 5-30

Reid, Lawrence A. 2005. The current status of Austric: A review and evaluation of the lexical and morphosyntactic evidence. In Laurent Sagart, Roger Blench and Alicia Sanchez-Mazas (eds.), The peopling of East Asia: putting together archaeology, linguistics and genetics. London, Routledge Curzon. pp. 81-106.

Reinecke, Andreas. 2009. Early cultures in Vietnam (first millennium B.C. to second century A.D.). In Nanoy Tingley (ed.) Arts of Viet Nam, from River Plain to Open Sea. Houston: The Museum of Fine Arts. 29-53. 

Renard, Ronald D. and Anchalee Singhanetra-Renard. (eds.) 2015. Mon-Khmer peoples of the Mekong region. Chiang Mai, Chiang Mai University Press. Kmhmu’ bibliography at pp. 443-382.

Renfrew, Colin. 1987. Archaeology and language, the puzzle of Indo-European origins. London: Jonathan Cape.

Revel, Nicole (ed.) 1988. Le riz en Asie du sud-est. [3 vols.] Paris: EHESS.

Reynaud, Le Docteur. 1962. Études des phonèmes viêtnamiens, par confrontation entre le viêtnamien et quelques dialectes des Haut-Plateaux du Sud-Viêtnam. Bulletin de la Société des Études Indochinoises, 37.2:117-153.

Rhodes, Alexandre de. (1991). Từ điển Annam-Lusitan-Latinh [original: Dictionarium Annamiticum Lusitanum et Latinum]. (L. Thanh, X. V. Hoàng, & Q. C. Đỗ, Trans.). Hanoi: Khoa h?c Xã h?i. (Original work published 1651). 

Riccio, Maria Eugenia, José Manuel Nunes, Melissa Rahal, Barbara Kervaire, Jean-Marie Tiercy, and Alicia Sanchez-Mazas. 2011. “The Austroasiatic Munda Population from India and Its Enigmatic Origin: A HLA Diversity Study.” Human Biology 83 (3): 405–35. https://doi.org/10.3378/027.083.0306.

Ring, Hiram and Felix Rau (eds.). 2018. Papers from the Seventh International Conference on Austroasiatic Lingusitics. JSEALS Special Publication No. 3. Manoa, University of Hawaii Press.

Ring, Hiram. 2012. A phonetic description and phonemic analysis of Jowai-Pnar. Mon-Khmer Studies 40:133–175. 

Ring, Hiram. 2014. Pnar. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages (2 vols.). Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 1186-1226. 

Ring, Hiram. 2015. A Grammar of Pnar. PhD thesis, Nanyang Technical University, Singapore.

Ringe, Don. 1999. How hard is it to match CVC-roots? Transactions of the Philological Society 97.2:213-244

Rischel, Jørgen. 1989. Can the Khmuic component in Mlabri (“Phi Tong Luang”) be identified as old T’in? Acta Orientalia 50.79–115. 

Rischel, Jørgen. 1995. Minor Mlabri: A Hunter-Gatherer Language of Northern Indochina. Copenhagen, Museum Tusculanum Publishers.

Rischel, Jørgen. 2007. Mlabri and Mon-Khmer. Copenhagen, Historisk-filosofiske Meddelelser 99.

Rispoli, F. 2008. The incised and impressed pottery of Mainland Southeast Asia: following the paths of Neolithization. East and West, 57:235-304.

Rizvi, S. N. H. The Shompen: a vanishing tribe of the Great Nicobar Island. Calcutta, Seagull Books (on behalf of the Anthropological Survey of India).

Robert & Emöke Szathmary (eds), Out of Asia: Peopling the Americas and the Pacific. Canberra: The Journal of Pacific History.

Roberts, H. 1875. Anglo-Khasi Dictionary of the use of schools and colleges. Calcutta. [Revised ed., 1878, Calcutta]

Roberts, H. 1876. Khassi Primer, Vernacular series, Part I & Part II with vocabulary. Calcutta: School Book Society

Roberts, H. 1891. A grammar of the Khassi language. London: Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co.

Roberts, John. 1914. Khasi Folklore. Carnarvon: O’Brian & Co.

Roberts, R. 1891. A grammar of the Khassi language. London, Kegan Paul, Trench, Trübner and Co. Ltd.

Robinson, W. 1849. “Notes on the Languages spoken by the various tribes inhabiting the Valley of Assam and its mountain confines.” Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal XVIII, Part I:183-237 & 310-49. Khassia grammar on pp. 334-36, comparative vocabulary on pp. 342-49 

Robinson, W. 1856. “The Khassia Hills.” Calcutta Review XXVII:56-??

Rojanakul, Nattamon. 2009. “Chong Syntax / ไวยากรณ์ภาษาชอง.” Mahidol University.

Rosenberg, Noah A., Saurabh Mahajan, Catalina Gonzalez-Quevedo, Michael G. B. Blum, Laura Nino-Rosales, Vasiliki Ninis, Parimal Das, et al. 2006. “Low Levels of Genetic Divergence across Geographically and Linguistically Diverse Populations from India.” PLOS Genetics 2 (12): e215. https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pgen.0020215.

ROSNY, Louis Léon de. 1869. Notice sur l’écriture thai ou siamoise. Archives paléographiques 1.62-77. [Atlas pl. 3 Mon script; also pl. 8 in comparative table]

Ross, M. Pawley, A. & M. Osmond eds. 2008. The lexicon of proto-Oceanic: the culture and society of ancestral Oceanic society. 3: plants. Pacific Linguistics 599. Canberra: ANU.

Ross, Malcolm 1988. Proto-Oceanic and the Austronesian languages of western Melanesia. Pacific Linguistics C-98, Canberra, Australian National University.

Ross, Malcolm D. 2006. "Metatypy". In K. Brown. Encyclopedia of language and linguistics (2nd ed.). Oxford: Elsevier.

Ross, Malcolm, 1986. Towards a classification of the Oceanic languages of Bougainville and the western Solomons. In Geraghty, Paul, Lois Carrington and S.A. Wurm (eds), FOCAL II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics. (Pacific Linguistics C-94), 175-200. Canberra: Australian National University.

Ross, Malcolm, 1988. Proto Oceanic and the Austronesian Languages of Western Melanesia. Pacific Linguistics (C-98). Canberra: Australian National University.

Ross, Malcolm, 1989. Proto-Oceanic consonant grade and Milke's *nj. In, Harlow, Ray, and Robin Hooper, eds VICAL 1 Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics , 433-496. Auickland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.

Roy, B.K. 1900. A Khasi Word Book. Shillong: Ri Khasi Press

Roy, B.K. 1905. Easy Hints to Khasi Grammar. Shillong: Ri Khasi Press

Roy, J.K. & B.C. Roy. 1982. A Study of the Juang Population of Orissa. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey

Roy, S.C. 1921. “Khasi Kinship Terms.” Man in India 1:233-38

Roy, Sarat Chandra & Ramesh Chandra Roy. 1937. The Khâr.iâs. Ranchi

Roy, Sarat Chandra. 1925. The Birhors: a little-known jungle tribe of Chota Nagpur. Ranchi

Ruben, Walter. 1939. Eisenschmiede und Dämonen in Indien Internationales Archiv für Ethnographie. Bd. 37, supplement. Leiden 

Ruhlen, Merrit. 1994. On the Origin of Languages: Studies in Linguistic Taxonomy. Stanford, Stanford University Press.

Rungsaengchan, Duangduean (ดวงเดือน รุ่งแสงจันทร์). 1973. “Khmer-Thai Dictionary / พจนานุกรมภาษาเขมร-ไทย.” Silpakorn University.

Russel, R.V. (assisted by Hira Lal). 1916. The Tribes and castes of the Central provinces of India. London. 4 vols. London: MacMillan and Co. Limited.

Sachdeva, M. P., S. S. Mastana, K. N. Saraswathy, A. M. Elizabeth, R. Chaudhary, and A. K. Kalla. 2004. “Short ReportGenetic Variation at Three VNTR Loci (D1S80, APOB and D17S5) in Two Tribal Populations of Andhra Pradesh, India.” Annals of Human Biology 31 (1): 95–102. https://doi.org/10.1080/03014460310001625978.

Sadock, J. 1991. Autolexical Syntax. Chicago: University of Chicago Press (some data on Gta? incorporation)

Sagart, Laurent. 1993. Chinese and Austronesian: evidence for a genetic relationship. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 21,1:1-62.

Sagart, Laurent. 1994. Old Chinese and Proto-Austronesian evidence for Sino-Austronesian. Oceanic Linguistics 33.2:271-308.

Sagart, Laurent. 2002. Sino-Tibeto-Austronesian: an updated and improved argument. Paper presented at the 9th International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, Canberra, January 8-11, 2002. https://www.academia.edu/2460148/Sino-Tibetan-Austronesian_an_updated_and_improved_argument

Sagart, Laurent, Roger Blench, & Alicia Sanchez-Mazas (eds.). 2005. The peopling of East Asia: putting together archaeology, linguistics and genetics. London: Routledge Curzon.

Sagart, Laurent. 2003. The vocabulary of cereal cultivation and the phylogeny of East Asian languages. Bulletin of the Indo-Pacific Prehistory Association 23 (Taipei Papers, Volume 1): 127-136.

Sagart, Laurent. 2004. The higher phylogeny of Austronesian and the position of Tai-Kadai. Oceanic Linguistics. 43.2:411–444.

Sagart, Laurent. 2005. Tai-Kadai as a subgroup of Austronesian. In L. Sagart, R. Blench & A. Sanchez-Mazas (Eds.), The peopling of East Asia: putting together archaeology, linguistics and genetics (pp. 177-181). London; New York: RoutledgeCurzon.

Sagart, Laurent 2008. The expansion of Setaria farmers in East Asia: a linguistic and archaeological model. In: Alicia Sanchez-Mazas, Blench, R.M., Ross, M.D., I. Peiros & Marie Lin eds. Human migrations in continental East Asia and Taiwan. Matching archaeology, linguistics and genetics. 133-158. London: Routledge.

Sagart, Laurent. 2011. The Austroasiatics: East to West or West to East. In Nicholas Enfield (ed.) Dynamics of human diversity. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp.345-359.

Sahoo, Sanghamitra, Anamika Singh, G. Himabindu, Jheelam Banerjee, T. Sitalaximi, Sonali Gaikwad, R. Trivedi, et al. 2006. “A Prehistory of Indian Y Chromosomes: Evaluating Demic Diffusion Scenarios.” Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America 103 (4): 843–48. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.0507714103.

Sahoo, Sanghamitra, and V.k. Kashyap. 2006. “Phylogeography of Mitochondrial DNA and Y-Chromosome Haplogroups Reveal Asymmetric Gene Flow in Populations of Eastern India.” American Journal of Physical Anthropology 131 (1): 84–97. https://doi.org/10.1002/ajpa.20399.

Sahu, Bhairabi Prasad. 1984. “ANCIENT ORISSA : THE DYNAMICS OF INTERNAL TRANSFORMATION OF THE TRIBAL SOCIETY.” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 45: 148–60.

Sahu, Bhairabi Prasad. 1990. “Arguing for Feudalism ‘From Below’ A Study in Orissa Setting (c.A.D. 400-c. 1100).” Proceedings of the Indian History Congress 51: 141–50.

Sahu, Bhairabi Prasad. 2012. “Community, Caste and Region: Perspectives from Early Orissa.” Social Scientist 40 (5/6): 3–17.

Sahu, Chaturbhuj. 1995. Birhor tribe: dimensions of development. New Delhi: Sarup & Sons

SAhu, Doman “samIr”. 1962, 1968. santAlI praveSikA. 2 Volumes

SAhu, Doman. 1998. hoR sereny. (pahil haTiny). rA~cI: bihAr sarkAr, kalyAN vibhAg, jan jAtIya bhAZA akAdamI

Sahu, Kalandi Chanar, Sakti Prasana Samantray & Paramananda Patel. 1993. Bonda. [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Academy of Tribal Dialects & Culture, XIV) (in Oriya)

Sâhu, r. p. 1979. khar.iyâ vyâkaran.. râ~cî: khar.iyâ vibhâg, gosnar kâlej

Sâhu, r.p. 1986. de´s-vide´s me~ kha.riyâ rîti (Protoaustraloid Group). râ~cî: satya bhâratî

Saifon Luamkhan. 1991. Phaasaa Chong Muu Baan Nam Khun 1, Khlong Phlu, Amphur Makham,  Changwat Chanthaburi. MA thesis. Silapakorn University.

Saillard, Claire. 1997. Rukai Maga dialect: morphology and syntax. The Formosan languages of Kaohsiung Hsien, ed. by Jen-Kuei Paul Li et al., 8-118. Kaohsiung: Kaohsiung Hsien Government.

Sak-Humphrey, Chhany. 1993. The Syntax of Nouns and Noun Phrases in Dated Pre-Angkorian Inscriptions. Mon-Khmer Studies 22:1-126. 

Sakamoto, Yasuyuki. 1994. Japanese-Mon Dictionary Vol.1. Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies No.29. Tokyo.

Sakamoto, Yasuyuki. 1996. Japanese-Mon Dictionary Vol.2. Institute for the Study of Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies No.32. Tokyo.

Saliphot, Keawta. 1998. “A Phonological Study of Vietnamese at Chumchon Watsritheppradittharam, Muang District, Nakhonphanom Province =: การศึกษาระบบเสียงภาษาเวียดนามที่ชุมชนวัดศรีเทพประดิษฐาราม อำเภอเมือง จังหวัดนครพนม.” Mahidol University.

Salmon, Claudine. 2018. Chinese epigraphic studies in Southeast Asia—an overview. In Daniel Perret (ed.) Writing for eternity. A survey of epigraphy in Southeast Asia. Paris: École Française dÉxtrême Orient. pp. 287-321.

Salmons, Joseph C. 1993. The Glottalic Theory: Survey and Synthesis. McLean (Virginia), Institute for the Study of Man.

Samal, Smrutirekha & Paramananda Patel. 1997. Bhumija. [Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Bhubaneswar: Academy of Tribal Dialects (Government of Orissa, Academy of Tribal Dialects & Culture, Tribal Language Study Series, XXI) (in Oriya)

Samantaray, Rajashree. 2004. “Palaeo Culture around the Malaguni Orissa.” University. http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in:8080/jspui/handle/10603/191047.

Samuells, E.A. 1856. “Notes on a forest race called Puttooas or Juanga, inhabiting certain of the Tributary Mehals of Cuttack.” Journal of the Asiatic Society of Bengal 25

Samuelsson, Rolf, Kristina Lindell & Elisabeth Lind. 1990. Laos and her culture. Stockholm: SIDA.

Sanchez-Mazas A., Blench, R.M., Ross, M.D., I. Peiros & Marie Lin eds. 2008. Human migrations in continental East Asia and Taiwan. Matching archaeology, linguistics and genetics. 3-19. London: Routledge

Sangmeen, Sa-ing (สอิ้ง แสงมีน). 1992. “The Kuy language of Yoeyprasat subdistrict, Nong Ki district, Buriram / ภาษากูย (ส่วย) ที่ตำบลเย้ยปราสาท อำเภอหนองกี่ จังหวัดบุรีรัมย์.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=56284&language=thai.

Sann, A., Carrol D., and Wood, I. 1996. The Xe Kaman Hydro-Electric Project, Laos: Balancing the Issues. Paper for International Conference on Aspects of Conflicts in Reservoir Development and Management 3rd-5th September 1996. London: City University.

Sarkar, Girindra Nath. 1916. “Ho Riddles.” Journal of the Bihar and Orissa Research Society. Patna. 2:350ff., 1919, 5:250ff.

Savina, François. 1916. Dictionnaire Miao-tseu-Français, précédé d'un précis de grammaire miao-tseu et suivi d'un vocabulaire français-miao-tseu. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient 16.2:1-246.

Savina, François. 1920. Lexique Français-méo, Hanoi, Imprimerie d'Extreme Orient.

Savina, François. 1931. Lexique đày-français accompagné d'un petit liexique français-đày et d'un tableau des différences dialects. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient 31:103-199.

Savina, François. 1939. Guide linguistique de l'Indochine française. Hongkong: Imprimerie de la Société des Missions Etrangères (2 vols.).

Savina, François. 1965. Le vocabulaire Bê . Présenté par André-Georges Haudricourt. Paris: Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient.

Schafer, R. 1960. Review of H.-J. Pinnow, Versuch einer Historischen Lautlehre der Kharia Sprache. Word, 16

Schane, Stanford. 1968. French phonology and morphology. Cambridge, MA.: MIT Press.

Schebesta, Paul. 1926. The jungle tribes of the Malay Peninsula. (Translated by C. O. Blagden.) Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies, London Institution 4:269-278.

Schebesta, Paul. 1926-28. Grammatical sketch of the Jahai dialect, spoken by a Negrito tribe of Ulu Perak and Ulu Kelantan, Malay Peninsula. (Translated by C. O. Blagden.) Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies, London Institution 4:803-26.

Schebesta, Paul. 1931. Grammatical sketch of the Ple-Temer language (translated by C. O. Blagden) Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society 1931:641-52.

Schebesta, Paul. 1952-57. Die Negrito Asiens: Geschichte, Geographie, Umwelt, Demographie und Anthropogie der Negrito.  Vol. 1, Vol 2 Part 1 &  2. Wien-Mödling Anthropos Institut, St. Gabriel Verlag.

Schapper, Antoinette. 2019. The Ethno-Linguistic Relationship between Smelling and Kissing: A Southeast Asian Case Study. Oceanic Linguistics 58.1:92-109.

Schein, Barry, and Donca Steriade. 1986. On geminates. Linguistic Inquiry 17: 691-744.

Schiering, R; Bickel, B; Hildebrandt, K. 2010. The prosodic word is not universal, but emergent. Journal of Linguistics, 46:657-709.

Schliesinger, Joachim. 1997 & 1998 (2 vols.). Hill Tribes of Vietnam. Bangkok, Thailand: White Lotus Press. 

Schliesinger, Joachim. 2000. Ethnic Groups of Thailand: Non-Tai-Speaking Peoples. Bangkok, Thailand: White Lotus Press. 

Schmidt, Pater Wilhelm. 1907, 1908. Les peuples mon-khmer, trait d’union entre les peuples de l’Asie centrale et de l’Austronésie. Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 7 (1907): 213-263 & Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 8 (1908): 1-35.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1901. Die Sprachen der Sakai und Semang auf Malacca und ihr Verhältnis zu den Mon-Khmer-Sprachen. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land-, en Volkenkunde van Nederlandsch-Indië, 52:399-583.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1903. The Sakai and Semang languages in the Malay Peninsula and their relation to the Mon-Khmer languages. Journal of the Straits Branch of the Royal Asiatic Society, 39:38-45.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1904. Grundzüge einer Lautlehreder Khasi-Sprache in ihren Beziehungen zu derjenigen der Mon-Khmer-Sprachen. Mit einem Anhang: die Palaung-Wa-, und Riang-Sprachen des mittleren Salwin. Abh. Bayrischen Akademie der Wissenschaft, 1.22.3:677-810.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1905. Grundzüge einer Lautlehre der Mon-Khmer-Sprachen. Denkschrift der Akademie der Wissenschaften, Wien, Philologisch-Historische Klasse 51:1-233.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1906. Die Mon-Khmer-Völker, ein Bindeglied zwischen Völkern Zentralasiens und Austronesiens. Archiv für Anthropologie, Braunschweig, 5:59-109.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1907. Die Sprachlaute und ihre Darstellung in einem allgemeinen linguistischen Alphabet. Anthropos [Khmer and Mon pp. 1076-1083].

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1907. Les Peuples Mon-Khmers. Bulletin de l'Ecole Française d'Extrême Orient Hanoi & Paris, 7:213-263 & 8:1-55 (French translation of 1906).

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1907-1908. “Les peuples môn-khmer, trait d’union entre les peuples de l’Asie centrale et de l’Austronésie.” Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient VII:213-63, VIII:1-35

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1926. Die Sprachfamilien und Sprachenkreise der Erde. 2 volumes. Heidelberg, Carl Winter.

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1930. Die Beziehungen der austrischen Sprachen zum Japanischen [The Connections of the Austric Languages to Japanese]. Wien Beitrag zur Kulturgeschichte und Linguistik 1:239-51. 

Schmidt, Wilhelm. 1937-9. Die Stellung der Munda-Sprachen. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 9:33-39.

Schmitt, J. 1904. Les chôongs. Revue Indochinoise II.3:161-162.

Schuessler, Axel. 2006. ABC Etymological Dictionary of Old Chinese. Hawaii; University of Hawaii Press.

Schwink, Frederick 1994. Linguistic Typology, Universiality and the Realism of Reconstruction. Institute for the Study of Man, Washington D.C.

Scott, James George and J. P. Hardiman. 1900. Gazetteer of Upper Burma and the Shan States 1.1. Rangoon, Superintendent, Government Printing. [includes Mon vocabulary by Taw Sen Ko pp. 626-643]

Scott, N.C. 1964. Nasal consonants in Land Dayak (Bukar-Sadong). In honour of Daniel Jones: Papers contributed on his eightieth birthday, 12 September 1961, eds. David Abercrombie, D.B. Fry, P.A.D. MacCarthy, N.C. Scott and, J.L.M. Trim, 432-36. London: Longmans.

SEAlang Mon-Khmer Etymological Dictionary. http://www. sealang. net/monkhmer/dictionary/. SEAlang Mon-Khmer languages project. 

Seam, Long. 1975. Ocherki po Leksikologii Kxmerskogo Jazyka. Moskva, "Nauka" Glavnaja redakcija vostochnoj literatury.

Seam, Long. 1992. Quelques traits grammaticaux charactéristiques de l’ancien khmer. Mon-Khmer Studies 20:19-30.

Sebeok, T. 1943. “Phonemic analysis of Santali” Journal of the American Oriental Society 63:66-7

Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.) 1971. Linguistics in Oceania. Current Trends in Linguistics (8). The Hague: Mouton.

Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.). Current Trends in Linguistics 5, Linguistics in South Asia. The Hague & Paris, Mouton,

Sebeok, Thomas A. 1942. An examination of the Austro-Asiatic Language family. Language, 18: 206-217.

Seidenfaden, E. 1943. Review of R. Baradat, Les sâ̆mre ou Peâ̆r, population primitive de l’ouest du Cambodge, Bulletin de l’École Française d’Etrême-Orient 41: 1-150, 1941. The Journal of the Siam Society 34(1): 73-80.

Seidenfaden, Erik. 1919. Further notes about the Chaubun, etc. Journal of the Siam Society, Bangkok. 13.3:47-53.

Seidenfaden, Erik. 1952. The Kui people of Cambodia and Siam. Journal of the Siam Society 39.2(Jan.):144–180. 

Seidlitz, Eric. 2004. Nasal Preplosion In Jakun Malay. Paper presented at the Eighth International Symposium on Malay and Indonesian Linguistics, July 2004, Penang, Malaysia.

Seidlitz, Eric. 2005. A Study of Jakun Malay: Some Aspects of its Phonology. Master's thesis. Bangi: Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia.

Selkirk, Elisabeth. 1982. Syllables. The structure of phonological representations (part II), ed. by Harry van der Hulst and Norvil Smith, 337-383. Dordrecht: Foris.

Selkirk, Elisabeth. 1984. On the major class features and syllable theory. In Aronoff & Oehrle (eds.) Language Sound Structure: Studies in Phonology. Cambridge: MIT Press. 107-136. 

Sen, B.K. 1955. “Notes on the Birhors.” In: Man in India 35:110-18.

Seng Mai, Ma. 2012. A Descriptive Grammar of Wa. MA thesis, Payap University, Thailand.

Shadap-Sen, Namita Catherine. 1981. The Origins and Early History of the Khasi-Synteng People. Calcutta: Firma KLM Private Limited.

Shafer, Robert. 1940. Nahali, A Linguistic Study in Paleo-Ethnography. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies 5:346-71.

Shafer, Robert. 1942. Annamese and Tibeto-Burmic. Harvard Journal of Asiatic Studies, 16:399-402.

Shafer, Robert. 1952. Études sur l’Austroasian. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, 48:111-158.

Shafer, Robert. 1954. Review of H. Maspero. Langues de l'Asie du Sud-Est. T'oung Pao, pp162-6.

Shafer, Robert. 1960. Review of Pinnow, Versuch einer historischen Lautlehre der Kharia Sprache. Word 16:424-433.

Shafer, Robert. 1965. Studies in Austroasian II. Studia Orientalia edidit societas orientalis fennica 30.5:3-69.

Shanta, K.M. n.d. “Kinship Terms in Khasi.” Indian Linguistics 41/3-4:139-50

Sharma, Devi Datt. 2003. Munda Sub-stratum of Tibeto-Himalayan Languages. New Delhi: Mittal Publications (Studies in Tibeto-Himalayan Languages, 7)

Sharma, Gunjan, Rakesh Tamang, Ruchira Chaudhary, Vipin Kumar Singh, Anish M. Shah, Sharath Anugula, Deepa Selvi Rani, et al. 2012. “Genetic Affinities of the Central Indian Tribal Populations.” PLoS ONE 7 (2). https://doi.org/10.1371/journal.pone.0032546.

Sharma, Hanjabam Surmangol. 1999. “A comparison between Khasi and Manipuri word order.” Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 22.1:139-48

Shatsuksiridate, Yowaluk (เยาวลักษณ์ ชาติสุขศิริเดช). 1987. “A description of the Mon language of Salui, Chumphorn: an Austroasiatic language in Thailand / ภาษามอญ ตำบลสลุย จังหวัดชุมพร.” Silpakorn University. http://www.thaithesis.org//detail.php?id=55907&language=thai.

Shelden, Howard. 1979. A Reconstruction of Proto-South Bahnaric. Ms. Essay submitted in partial fulfillment of course requirements in non-Indo-European languages, University of Texas at Arlington. Copy held at Summer Institute of Linguistics Library Bangkok.

Shelley, George. 1979. Wudai êukai, the language, the context and its relationships. Ph.D. dissertation, Hartford University. 

Shen, Yu-May. 2003. Phonology of Sanchong Gelao. The University of Texas at Arlington.

Shevoroshkin, Vitaly & Paul Sidwell (eds.). Lexicostatistics & Historical Linguistics, Melbourne, Association for the History of Language.

Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.) 1991. Dene-Sino-Caucasian Languages. Brockmeyer, Bochum.

Shevoroshkin, Vitaly (ed.). 1989. Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Brockmeyer, Bochum.

Shimizu, Masaaki. 2000. Khảo sát sơ lược về cấu trúc âm tiết tiếng Việt vào thế kỷ XIV-XV qua hai cứ liệu chữ Nôm (A brief survey of Vietnamese syllable structure in the XIV-XVth centuries in two Nom scripts). In Việt Nam Học - Kỷ Yếu Hội Thảo Quốc Tế Lần Thứ Nhất. Hà Nội: Thế giới. 252-265. 

Shimizu, Masaaki. 2015. A reconstruction of ancient Vietnamese initials using Chữ Nôm materials. 国立国語研究所論集 (NINJAL Research Papers) 9:135-158. 

Shimizu, Masaaki, Lê Thị Liên, and Shiro Momoki. 2005. A trace of disyllabicity of Vietnamese in the 14th century: Chữ Nôm characters contained in the inscription of Hộ Thành Mountain. Kobe City University of Foreign Studies 64:17-49. 

Shintani, Tadahiko. 2008. The Palaung Language: Comparative Lexicon of its Southern Dialects. Tokyo, Research Institute for Language and Cultures of Asia and Africa. 

Shorto, Harry L. (ed.) 1963. Linguistic Comparison in South-East Asia and the Pacific. London, University of London. School of Oriental and African Studies. 

Shorto, Harry L. (ed.). 1963. Linguistic comparison in South East Asia and the Pacific London, Luzac. 

Shorto, Harry L. 1945. Quantification in Mon. in: D. SINOR, ed., Proceedings of the 23rd International Congress of Orientalists, Cambridge [UK], August 21-28, 1954. London, Royal Asiatic Society [1956-1957], 278-279.

Shorto, Harry L. 1956. Notes on Mon epigraphy. BSOAS 18. 344-352

Shorto, Harry L. 1957. Palaung wordlist (Based on material collected from Paw´shwe Kya, Namhsan, MS. Sept-Oct.).

Shorto, Harry L. 1958. The Kyaikmaraw inscriptions. BSOAS 21. 361-367. [pl., DMI inscr. nos. 48, 87]

Shorto, Harry L. 1960. Word and syllable paterns in Palaung. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 23:544-57.

Shorto, Harry L. 1962. A Dictionary of Modern Spoken Mon. London: Oxford University Press.

Shorto, Harry L. 1963. The Structural pattern of northern Mon-Khmer languages. In H.L. Shorto, (ed.) Linguistic Comparison in South-East Asia and the Pacific. pp 45-61.

Shorto, Harry L. 1965. The interpretation of archaic writing systems, illustrated by the analysis of the phonological systems in early Mon dialects. In G. B. Milner and E. J. A. Henderson (eds.) Indo-Pacific Linguistic Studies 1. Amsterdam, North-Holland. Pp. 88-97.

Shorto, Harry L. 1966. Mon vowel systems. in: C. E. BAZELL et all., eds., In memory of J. R. Firth, London, Longmans, 398-408. [SM vocalism, Moulmein dialect]

Shorto, Harry L. 1966. The Devatâ plaques of the Ananda basement. in: BA SHIN et al., eds., Essays offered to G. H. Luce by his colleagues and friends in honur of his 75th birthday. Ascona, Artibus Asiae, Vol. 2, 156-165. [23 ill. On 4 plates]

Shorto, Harry L. 1967. The Register Distinctions in Mon-Khmer Languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx-Universität Leipzig. 16: 245-248.

Shorto, Harry L. 1969. Mon labial clusters. BSOAS 32.104-113. [invokes various MK material, PMK * [C]p> Mon –w-]

Shorto, Harry L. 1971. A dictionary of the Mon inscriptions, from the sixth to the sixteenth centuries, incorporating materials collected by the late C.O. Blagden (London Oriental Series 24). London, Oxford University Press.

Shorto, Harry L. 1972. The word for ‘two’ in Austroasiatic. In Jacqueline M.C. Thomas & Lucien Bernot (eds.) Langues et techniques, nature et société, Vol. 1, Approche linguistique. Paris, Klincksieck. pp.233-35.

Shorto, Harry L. 1973. Three Mon-Khmer Word Families. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies, 36: 374-81.

Shorto, Harry L. 1975. Achinese and Mainland Austronesian. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 38.1:81-102.

Shorto, Harry L. 1976. Gayo consonant correspondences. In Nguyen Dang Liem (ed.) South-East Asian linguistic studies. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp199-217.

Shorto, Harry L. 1976. In Defense of Austric. Computational analyses of Asian and African languages 6:95-104. 

Shorto, Harry L. 1976. The Vocalism of Proto-Mon-Khmer. Philip N. Jenner, Laurence C. Thompson, and Stanley Starosta (eds.). Austroasiatic Studies. Honolulu: University of Hawaii (Oceanic Linguistics, Special Publication, No. 13). Part II, pp.1041-1067. 

Shorto, Harry L. 1979. The linguistic proto-history of mainland South East Asia. in: R. B. Smith & W. Watson (eds.), Early South East Asia. New York, Kuala Lumpur, Oxford University Press. pp.273-278. 

Shorto, Harry L. 2006. A Mon-Khmer Comparative Dictionary. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Shorto, Harry L. ms. (circa. 1980) draft Proto-Katuic reconstruction.

Shorto, Harry L., Judith M. Jacob, and E.H.S. Simmonds (eds.). 1963. Bibliographies of Mon-Khmer and Tai linguistics (London Oriental bibliographies 12). London, Oxford University Press.

Shutler, Richard, Jr. & Jeff Marck. 1975. 'On the dispersal of the Austronesian horticulturalists', Archaeology and Physical Anthropology in Oceania, 10(2):81-113.

SHWE ZAN AUNG. 1921. The influence of Bengal on the Môn language. JBRS. 11.119-122.

Si, Aung, and Samira Agnihotri. 2014. Solega Place Names and Their Ecological Significance. Anthropological Linguistics 56 (3/4): 389–414.

Si, Aung. 2014. Danau. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.). 2014. The handbook of Austroasiatic languages (2 vols.). Leiden and Boston, Brill. Pp. 1106-1141. 

Siba Prasad Rout. 1969/70 “Handbook of the Juang.” Adibasi

Sidwell, Paul and Andrew Hsiu. 2019. Pakanic tonogenesis in Areal and Etymological Perspective. Paper presented at The 52nd International Conference on Sino-Tibetan Languages and Linguistics, Sydney June 24-26.

Sidwell, Paul and Felix Rau. 2014. Austroasiatic Comparative-Historical Reconstruction: an overview. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 221–362. (published Dec. 2014, copyrighted 2015)

Sidwell, Paul and Pascale Jacq. 2003. A Handbook of Comparative Bahnaric: Volume 1, West Bahnaric. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.  

Sidwell, Paul and Roger Blench. 2011. The Austroasiatic Urheimat: the Southeastern Riverine Hypothesis. In Nicholas Enfield (ed.) Dynamics of human diversity. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics. pp.315-344.

Sidwell, Paul. 1996a. Review of Alexander Vovin. A Reconstruction of Proto-Ainu. Leiden, E. J. Brill. In Diachronica 13.1: 179-186.

Sidwell, Paul. 1996b. Review of Tom Dutton & Darrell T. Tryon (eds.). Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, Trends in Linguistic Theory: studies and monographs 77. In Diachronica 13.2: 365-369.

Sidwell, Paul. 1998. A Reconstruction of Proto-Bahnaric. PhD thesis, University of Melbourne.  (submitted 1998, confered 1999).

Sidwell, Paul. 1999. The Austroasiatic numerals 1 to 10 from a historical and typological perspective. In Numeral Types and Changes Worldwide. Edited by Jadranka Gvozdanovic. Amsterdam, John Benjamins Publishing Company. 253–271.

Sidwell, Paul. 2000, Proto South Bahnaric: a reconstruction of a Mon-Khmer language of Indo-China. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics.

Sidwell, Paul. 2001. Comments on La Vaughn H. Hayes' "On the Origin of Affricates in Austric". Mother Tongue VI:119-121. 

Sidwell, Paul. 2002. Genetic classification of the Bahnaric languages: a comprehensive review. Mon-Khmer Studies 32:1-24.

Sidwell, Paul. 2005. Acehnese and the Aceh-Chamic Language Family. In Chamic and beyond: Studies in mainland Austronesian languages, Anthony Grant and Paul Sidwell eds. 211-246. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics PL 569. 

Sidwell, Paul. 2005. The Katuic Languages: classification, reconstruction and comparative lexicon. Munich, Lincom Europa.

Sidwell, Paul. 2006. Preface to Shorto 2006 A Mon-Khmer Comparative Dictionary. Canberra, Pacific Linguistics 579; pp. vii-xxv.

Sidwell, Paul. 2008 Issues in the Morphological Reconstruction of Proto-Mon-Khmer. In Claire Bowern, Bethwyn Evans and Luisa Miceli (eds.) Morphology and Language History in honour of Harold Koch. Amsterdam, John Benjamins Publishing Company. pp. 251–265.

Sidwell, Paul. 2008. Is Mon-Khmer dead? Long live Austroasiatic! Paper read to 18th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, Universiti Kebangsaan Malaysia, Bangi.

Sidwell, Paul. 2009. Classifying the Austroasiatic languages: history and state of the art. Munich, Lincom Europa.

Sidwell, Paul. 2009. Proto-Mon-Khmer Vocalism: moving on from Shorto's 'alternances'. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1:205–214.

Sidwell, Paul. 2009. The Austroasiatic Central Riverine Hypothesis. Keynote address read to the 19th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, University of Social Sciences and Humanities, Vietnam National University-Ho Chi Minh City, 28 May 2009.

Sidwell, Paul. 2010. Comparative Mon-Khmer Linguistics in the 20th Century: where from, where to? Austro-Asiatic Linguistics. In K.S. Nagaraja & Kashyap Mankodi (eds.) (Proceedings of the 3rd International Conference on Austroasiatic Languages). Mysore, Central Institute of Indian Languages. pp. 36–104.  

Sidwell, Paul. 2010. The Austroasiatic central riverine hypothesis. Journal of Language Relationship. 4:117-134.

Sidwell, Paul. 2010b. What can the Mon-Khmer lexical borrowings in Acehnese tell us? In John Bowden, Nikolaus P. Himmelmann and Malcolm Ross (eds.) A journey through Austronesian and Papuan linguistic and cultural space: papers in honour of Andrew K. Pawley. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics, PL-615, pp. 271–282.

Sidwell, Paul. 2011. Katuic-Bahnaric: Austroasiatic sub-family or convergence area? In Sophana Srichampa, Paul Sidwell & Kenneth Gregerson (eds.) Austroasiatic Studies: papers from the ICAAL4: Mon-Khmer Studies Journal Special Issue No. 3. Dallas, SIL International; Canberra, Pacific Linguistics; Salaya, Mahidol University. pp.100-111

Sidwell, Paul. 2011. Proto Bahnaric. http://sealang.net/monkhmer/database/.

Sidwell, Paul. 2011. Proto-Khasian and Khasi-Palaungic. Journal of the Southease Asian Linguisics Society 4.2:144-168.

Sidwell, Paul. 2013. Proto-Khmuic. Available online http://sealang.net/monkhmer/database/.

Sidwell, Paul. 2013.  Expressives in Austroasiatic. In Jeffrey P. Williams (ed.) The Aesthetics of Grammar: Sound and Meaning in the Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia. New York, Cambridge University Press. ISBN 978-1-107-00712-3. pp. 17–35. 

Sidwell, Paul. 2014. Car Nicobarese. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 1229–1265.

Sidwell, Paul. 2014. Austroasiatic Classification. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 144–220. (published Dec. 2014, copyrighted 2015)

Sidwell, Paul. 2014. Khmuic classification and homeland. Mon-Khmer Studies 43.1:47–56.

Sidwell, Paul. 2014. Old Khmer. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 643–676.

Sidwell, Paul and Felix Rau. 2014 Austroasiatic Comparative-Historical Reconstruction: an overview. In Mathias Jenny & Paul Sidwell (eds.) The handbook of Austroasiatic languages. Leiden, Boston: Brill. pp. 221–362.

Sidwell, Paul. 2015. Local drift and areal convergence in the Restructuring of Mainland Southeast Asian Languages. In Nicholas Enfield and Bernard Comrie (eds.) Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: the state of the art. Berlin: deGruyterMouton. pp. 51–81. 

Sidwell, Paul. 2015. Austroasiatic dataset for phylogenetic analysis: 2015 version. Mon-Khmer Studies 44.lxviii-ccclvii.

Sidwell, Paul. 2015. The Palaungic Languages: Classification, Reconstruction and Comparative Lexicon. Munich, Lincom Europa.

Sidwell, Paul. 2018. Austroasiatic deep chronology and the problem of cultural lexicon, Paper presented at the 28th Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society. Kaohsung Taiwan.

Sidwell, Paul. 2020. Nicobarese Comparative Grammar. In Mathias Jenny, Paul Sidwell, Mark Alves (eds.). Austroasiatic Syntax in Areal and Diachronic Perspective. Leiden/Boston: Brill. pp. 82-104.

Sidwell, Paul. 2020. Proto-Austroasiatic cultural lexicon: retention or diffusion. In Tariq Khan (ed.) Alternative Horizons in Linguistics: a festschrift in honour of Prof. Panchanan Mohanty. Munich: LINCOM GmbH.

Sidwell, Paul & Mathias Jenny. 2021. MSEA Epigraphy. In Paul Sidwell & Mathias Jenny (eds.) The Languages and Linguistics of Mainland Southeast Asia: A Comprehensive Guide. Walter de Gruyter: Berlin/Boston. pp.879-905.

Sidwell, Paul. ms. Cheng wordlist collected October 1996.

Sievers, E. 1881. Grundzüge der Phonetik. Leipzig, Breitkopf and Hartel.

Sigurd, Bengt & Damrong Tayanin. 2008. ‘Creativity and tradition in baby naming’. Working papers (Dept. of Linguistics and Phonetics, Lund University) 53, 133–44.

SIL archives. 2002. Jah Hut data. Unpublished wordlists.

Silapachai, Khomkham (คมขำ ศิลปชัย). 1986. “A phonological study of Middle Khmer [post-Angkorean] / การศึกษาระบบเสียงภาษาเขมรโบราณสมัยกลาง [ยุคหลังพระนคร].” Silpakorn University.

Silva, Marina, Marisa Oliveira, Daniel Vieira, Andreia Brandão, Teresa Rito, Joana B. Pereira, Ross M. Fraser, et al. 2017. “A Genetic Chronology for the Indian Subcontinent Points to Heavily Sex-Biased Dispersals.” BMC Evolutionary Biology 17 (1): 88. https://doi.org/10.1186/s12862-017-0936-9.

Simon, I.M. 1978. “Khasi Adverbs.” Second Interantional Congress of Austroasiatic Linguistics, Mysore (circulated, not presented)

Simons, Gary. 1979. Language variation and limits of communication. Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics. 

Singh, Bageshwar and Ajit K. Danda. 1986. The Kodaku of Surguja. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey of India.

Singh, U. Nissor. 1906. (reprinted 1983). Khasi-English Dictionary. Shillong, Eastern Bengal and Assam Secretariat Press, 6.

Singh, U. Nissor. see “Nissor Singh, U.” above

Sinha, Dikshit. 1984. The Hill Kharia of Purulia. Impact of Poverty on a Hunting and Gathering Tribe. Calcutta: Anthropological Survey (???) (Anthropological Survey of India, Memoir no. 59)

Sinha, N.K. 1974. Mundari phonetic reader. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Sinha, N.K. 1975. Mundari Grammar. Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages

Sinha, Saloni. 2000. Causatives in Kharia, Kurux and Santhali. A Case of Language Convergence in Jharkhand. M.Phil. Dissertation, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi

Sinha, Saloni. 2000. Causatives in Kharia, Kurux and Santhali. A Case of Language Convergence in Jharkhand. M.Phil. Dissertation, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi

Sirajuddin, S.M., R. Duggirala, and M.H. Crawford. 1994. “Population Structure of the Chenchu and Other South Indian Tribal Groups: Relationships between Genetic, Anthropometric, Dermatoglyphic, Geographic, and Linguistic Distances.” Human Biology 66 (5): 865–84.

Sirikarn Charoentham. 1987. Phaasaa Chong Muu Baan Thung Ta-In, Changwat Chanthaburi [Chong Language, Thung Ta-In village, Chanthaburi province]. Thesis, Silapakorn University.

Siriphan, Narumon (นฤมล ศิริพันธุ์). 2011. “Color terms and attitude toward color of Thai, Pwo Karen, Mon and Khmu in Amphoe Si Sawat, Kanchanaburi province / คำเรียกสีและทัศนคติที่มีต่อสีของผู้พูดภาษาไทย กะเหรี่ยงโปว์ มอญ และขมุ ในอำเภอศรีสวัสดิ์ จังหวัดกาญจนบุรี.” นครปฐม: Silpakorn University.

Sirisup, Nitipun (นิติพันธุ์ ศิริทรัพย์). 1981. “Dvaravati votive tablets at Nakhon Pathom / พระพิมพ์ดินเผาสมัยทวารวดีที่นครปฐม.” Silpakorn University.

Sitapati, G.V. 1933. “Pareng.” A Miscellany of Papers Presented to Rao Sahib Mahopadhyaya Gidugu Venkata Ramamurthi. Madras. 145-65

Siu Ha Dieu. 1976. Jarai Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lesson, No.22. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Skeat, Walter Willian & Charles Otto Blagden. 1906. Pagan Races of the Malay Peninsula. 2 Vols. London: Macmillan.

Skrefsrud, L.O. 1873. A Grammar of the Santhal Language. Benares: Medical Hall Press

Smalley, William A. (ed.) 1976. Phonemes and Orthography: Language Planning in Ten Minority Languages of Thailand. Pacific Linguistics Series C-No.43. Canberra, Australian National University.

Smalley, William A. 1955. Srê Phonemes and Syllables. Journal of the American Oriental Society, 74: 217-222.

Smalley, William A. 1956. Outline of Khmu structure. XX dissertation, Columbia University.

Smalley, William A. 1961. Outline of Khmu' Structure. Journal of the American Oriental Society Essay 2. New Haven, American Oriental Society.

Smalley, William A. 1964. Ethnolinguistic survey of northern Khmer speaking people in northeast Thailand (with data on Kuy). Unpublished manuscript. 

Smalley, William A. 1973. Bibliography of Khmu? Mon-Khmer Studies. 4:23-32. 

Smalley, William A. 1994. Linguistic diversity and national unity: Language ecology in Thailand. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. 

Smedal, Olaf H. 1987. "Lom-Indonesian-English and English-Lom wordlists." NUSA Linguistic Studies of Indonesian and Other Languages in Indonesia, 28/29. Jakarta: Lembaga Bahasa, Universitas Katolik Indonesia Atma Jaya.

Smith, Kenneth & Marilyn Smith 1967-1977 Sedang Dictionary. Dallas, Summer Institute of Linguistics microfiche publications.

Smith, Kenneth and Paul Sidwell. 2014. Sedang. In Mathias Jenny and Paul Sidwell (eds.). The handbook of Austroasiatic languages (2 vols.). Leiden and Boston, Brill. Pp. 789-833.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1972. A Phonological Reconstruction of Proto-North-Bahnaric. Summer Institute of Linguistics, Santa Ana, California.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1967a. Sedang Language Lessons. Trilingual Language Lessons, No.2, part 2. Manila, Summer Institute of Linguistics.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1967b. Sedang vocabulary. Saigon, Summer Institute of Linguistics (also republished by Summer Institute of Linguistics Manila 1977).

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1967c. A Phonological Reconstruction of Proto Central North Bahnaric. University of North Dakota Summer Institute of Linguistics Workpapers.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1967d. Sedang Dialects. MA Thesis, University of North Dakota.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1969a. Sedang Affixation. Mon-Khmer Studies 3. Honolulu, University of Hawaii Press, pp108-129.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1969b. Sedang Ethnodialects. Anthropological Linguistics, 11.5: 143-147.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1970. Vietnam Word Lists (Revised): Kơtua. Copy of manuscript at Summer Institute of Linguistics Bangkok, folder 495.9 set 2).

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1973a. Eastern North Bahnaric: Cua and Kotua. Mon-Khmer Studies, 4: 113-118.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1973b. More on Sedang Ethnodialects. Mon-Khmer Studies, 4: 43-51.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1974. A computer analysis of Vietnam language relationships. Work Papers of the Summer Institute of Linguistics, University of North Dakota Session. 18:99-113. DOI: 10.31356/silwp.vol18.08 

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1975a. Phonology and syntax of Sedang: a Vietnam Mon-Khmer language. PhD. dissertation, University of Pennsylvania.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1975b. The velar animal prefix relic in Vietnam languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman area 2.1:1-18.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1976. North Bahnaric Numeral Systems. In Diffloth, Gérard, and Norman H. Zide (eds.). Austroasiatic Number Systems (Linguistics Special Publication 174). The Hague, Mouton.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1978. The Payoff from Rhyming Dictionaries: Distribution and Frequency of Word-final -VCs and a Bridge between Bahnaric and Katuic. ms. Paper prepared for presentation to the Second International Austroasiatic Linguistic Conference, Mysore, India, Dec. 18-21, 1978. ms. Summer Institute of Linguistics Bangkok.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1979. Sedang Grammar. Canberra, Australian National University.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1981. A Lexico-statistical study of 45 Mon-Khmer languages. In Andre Gonzalez and David Thomas (eds), Linguistics Across Continents. Manila SIL, pp 180-205.

Smith, Kenneth, D. 1992. The -VC Rhyme Link Between Bahnaric and Katuic. Mon-Khmer Studies 18-19: 109-59.

Smith, Kenneth. 1972. A phonological reconstruction of Proto-North-Bahnaric. Santa Ana, Summer Institute of Linguistics (Language Data, Asian-Pacific Series 2).